JP2022132642A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress an illegal game in a game machine.

SOLUTION: A game area where a game ball can flow down is provided. Shooting means capable of shooting a game ball in the game area is provided. A shooting path capable of guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means to the game area is provided. The game balls that flow backward in the shooting path without reaching the game area are made to enter an opening port. Ball entry means is provided in which the game ball that has entered the opening port can enter. A protruding piece is provided that protrudes from below the opening port toward the shooting path.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a game ball shot by a shooting device is dropped in a game area, and the game ball enters a winning hole provided in the game area, thereby giving a privilege to a player. ing.

JP 2007-252627 A

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to obtain a privilege greater than the number of game balls fired by the shooting device, a game ball attached with a filamentous body is manipulated and the ball is detected multiple times. There was a problem that

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraudulent games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area, and a game ball shot by the shooting means. A launch path having a path that can be guided to the game area, and an opening into which a game ball that has flowed backward through the launch path without reaching the game area provided in the launch path can enter; A game value equivalent to the entered game ball is given to the player based on the entry means for allowing the game ball entered into the opening and the entry of the game ball into the entry means. and a protruding piece protruding from below the opening toward the firing path.

The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the protruding piece has a substantially opening width of the opening, and is arranged so as to protrude to a position facing the opening. be.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the protruding piece is formed of an elastic body, and when receiving the backflowing game ball, the backflowing game ball receive and guide the game ball to the opening, and receive an external force greater than that received from the backflow game ball in the direction opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball, elastically deform in the opposite direction It is something to do.

A gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein at least the tip of the projecting piece is provided with a cutting means having a predetermined cutting force.

A gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, which communicates with the opening, and the game ball entering the ball-entering means from the opening is passed through the ball-entering means. The guide passage has a guide passage leading to the opening, and the guide passage is formed with a protruding portion that protrudes from the opening side.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is an effect that it is possible to make illegal games difficult to be played by the protruding piece with which the filamentous body attached to the game ball abuts.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of claim 1, there is an effect that the filamentous body can be reliably brought into contact.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of claim 1 or 2, the protruding piece with which the filament abuts is elastically deformed, so there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to play illegal games.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effect of any one of claims 1 to 3, by enabling the cutting means to cut the filamentous body, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent games. .

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effect of any one of claims 1 to 4, by providing a plurality of parts with which the filament abuts, it is possible to make illegal games more difficult to play. effective.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame and a lower tray unit removed; FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the pachinko machine in FIG. 2. FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a state in which the fraudulent game in FIG. 3 is being executed. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM in a main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a RAM in a main control device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value, and (b) is the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of the big win. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type when it is out (normal), and (d) is a variation type counter CS1 when it is out (probable variation) 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between , and fluctuation types. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM in an audio ramp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a RAM in the audio ramp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing switch reading processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing external output processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing ball entry abnormality determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing the start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower tray unit in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower tray unit in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 4th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 5th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 6th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment.

A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed, and FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the foul ball entry path 606, FIG. 4 is an explanatory view of the operation when a game ball with string enters the foul ball entry path 606, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 2) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails 801 and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 having a function of storing balls is projected forward from the front frame 14 and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17. - 特許庁The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). (not shown) and is guided to the supply ball launching unit 112a. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-reach effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball hole 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the themes given to each stage. It is The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. ”→“Island stage”→“City stage”→…. Also, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to the "town stage".

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. and an operation amount detection switch 51c formed by . When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (detection result of the operation amount detection switch 51c) changes corresponding to the operation amount. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor (detection result of the operation amount detection switch 51c) that changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51, thereby flying in response to the player's operation. A ball is driven to the front surface of the game board 13 by the amount. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is arranged at a rail mounting portion provided on the inner frame 12. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is erected like the outer rail 62 . The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

Firing region 701 will be described with reference to FIG. The firing area 701 is surrounded in the left-right direction by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (partly including the guide member 605), and in the front-rear direction by the front surface of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). This area is a substantially arcuate path formed on the left side of the game area with an inner rail 61 interposed therebetween.

The outer rail 62 is composed of an elongated stainless steel metal strip, and is attached to a resin (fluorine-containing polycarbonate with low frictional resistance) molded rail attachment portion disposed on the inner frame 12 . . In particular, the surface facing the inner rail with a predetermined gap is formed of a single metal strip, and when the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a passes through the shooting path, the metal strip is formed. It touches the seams so that the firing direction and firing strength are not affected.

Incidentally, the structure of the outer rail 62 may be erected on the game board 13 in the same manner as the inner rail 61 .

The shooting path 701 is provided to guide game balls shot from the ball shooting unit provided in the lower tray unit 15 of the inner frame 12 from above the game board 13 to the game area. A gap 802 is formed between the starting end of the launch path 701 and the terminal end of the launch rail 801. A game ball falling into the gap 802 flows down a foul ball passage 800b, which will be described later, to the upper tray 17. and returned. On the other hand, the end of the shooting path formed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 has a first opening 603 communicating with the game area, and the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a It passes through the opening 603 and reaches the game area.

The passage width of the launch path 701 has an interval that allows two game balls to pass through at the starting end, and is formed so as to gradually narrow toward the position where it passes through the guide member 605. At the passing position, the width of the passage is narrowed so that one game ball can pass therethrough. After passing through the guide member 605, the width is widened again to allow two game balls to pass through, and then gradually narrows again toward the terminal end. The reason why the width of the passage becomes narrow at the position where the guide member 605 passes will be described later.

A return ball prevention member 68 is attached in the vicinity of the first opening 603 . The return ball prevention member 68 prevents the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. In addition, the launch path 701 is provided with a second opening 604 that serves as an opening for a foul ball entry passage 606, which will be described later, and a launch ball detection switch 208b that detects game balls passing through the launch path 701. . A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Further, the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 are fixed by a resin circular arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is

The ball shooting unit 112 a is a unitized mechanism for shooting game balls supplied from the upper tray 17 toward a game area provided on the game board 13 . The ball shooting unit 122a is composed of members such as a shooting solenoid, a shooting rail 801, a ball feeding mechanism, and a positioning member, and is assembled to a base plate made by pressing a flat metal plate. The base plate assembled with each member is fixed to the inner frame 12 with screws.

If there is a slight error in the attachment position of each member constituting the ball shooting unit 112a and the attachment position of the ball shooting unit 112a to the inner frame for each pachinko machine 10, the shooting angle of the game ball to the game board 13 and the Since the firing strength is different, high-precision mounting is required. Therefore, the base plate is provided with fastening holes for attaching each member and bosses for fixing the position of each member, thereby enabling highly accurate attachment. Furthermore, a plurality of (six) screw holes are provided for attaching the base plate to the inner frame, so that the base plate can be attached to the inner frame with high accuracy.

The firing solenoid has a unit configuration in which a linear solenoid is housed in a case member. The firing solenoid is provided with a metal plunger arranged in parallel with the firing rail 801 in the longitudinal direction, and a resin cap covering the tip of the plunger. As the material of the cap, polyester-based thermoplastic elastomer is adopted in this embodiment. While the player rotates the operating handle 51, the firing solenoid is repeatedly energized and de-energized every predetermined time (0.6 seconds), and the plunger is repeatedly appeared and retracted accordingly. . When the plunger protrudes, the game ball positioned on the launch rail 801 by a positioning member, which will be described later, is launched obliquely upward toward the launch rail. A variable resistor interlocking with the operating handle 51 is connected to the firing solenoid, and the projecting speed of the plunger is adjusted based on the amount of operation of the operating handle 51. It is adjusted by the amount of rotation.

The shooting rail guides the game ball just after it is shot by the shooting solenoid, and is set at a predetermined shooting angle (20 degrees) so that the game ball is shot toward the shooting area 701 provided on the front surface of the game board 13. I had. The launch rail is formed to have an M-shaped cross section, and has a shape that suppresses variations in the game balls by allowing the game balls to pass through the central groove. Furthermore, in order to suppress variations in game balls and supply more stable game balls to the launch area 701, the length of the launch rail 801 is extended from the launch solenoid mounting position to the upper end of the area covered by the lower tray unit 15. It is set to 100 mm. A gap 802 , which will be described later, is provided between the end of the launch rail 801 and the launch area 701 .

The ball feeding mechanism feeds game balls continuously supplied from the upper tray 17 one by one to the starting end of the launch rail 801 . This ball feeding mechanism is attached to the base plate so as to cover the firing solenoid, and is equipped with a metal piece and an electromagnet for attracting the metal piece inside. moves upward, and when the electromagnet is de-excited, it moves downward due to its own weight. The mechanism is provided with a storage section capable of storing one game ball supplied from the upper tray 17 while the metal piece is moving upward. Then, when the electromagnet is de-excited and the metal piece moves downward due to its own weight, the above-mentioned housing portion communicates with the guide passage to the launch rail 801, and the game ball housed in the housing portion is directed toward the launch rail 801. flowing down.

The positioning member supports the game ball placed on the starting end of the launch rail 801, and can slightly change the launch position of the game ball. The positioning member is a cylindrical member attached to the base plate by an eccentric shaft, and the distance between the positioning member and the firing rail can be changed by rotating the cylindrical member about the eccentric shaft. It has a configuration that allows

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 designs) will be drawn. In the lottery for the special pattern performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special pattern is a jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that the special pattern is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot. is also determined. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ), and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot type of the special pattern, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as an added value after the jackpot is finished, a game in accordance with these jackpot types is provided. (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the lottery for the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, A special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed in the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and is also shown by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is performed and the variable display according to the lottery. is started. A special prize winning opening 65 a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first ball entry opening 64 . Therefore, during the special game state, since the player hits the ball to win the special winning hole 65a, many balls enter the first ball entering hole 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64 becomes maximum (4 times).

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67, a determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. become a state. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is changed to the first symbol display device 37. , and is also shown in the second symbol reserve lamp 84 . When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery. is started.

As described above, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols. When "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R jackpot). After that, in the "jackpot A", as an added value after the jackpot is finished, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a special pattern high probability state (special pattern definite variable state) from after the jackpot is finished until the next jackpot is generated. be. On the other hand, in the "jackpot B", as an added value after the jackpot ends, the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is set short during the period from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of the special pattern is completed 100 times. A time-saving state is given.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is up, the so-called special symbol high probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R It is a game state that easily shifts to a jackpot). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "time saving state of normal design" (during time saving of normal design) means that the winning probability of normal design is increased, the fluctuation time is shortened, and the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 It refers to a game state in which the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64, which is long and the number of openings is large. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal pattern", it is called "normal state of normal pattern", which means that the probability of hitting the normal pattern is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. .

Thereafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of high probability of special symbols after the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, the period from the end of the big win to the occurrence of the next big win is defined as the probability variable period of the special symbols. called. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal patterns after the special symbol jackpot ends, that is, the period after the jackpot ends until the special pattern lottery is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times) is It is usually called a short period of time in the design (simply called a short period of time). In addition, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, the number of lotteries of special symbols is used to indicate the time period of normal symbols. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 100 times, it is described that the time period of the normal symbol is 100 times.

The number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period of "normal pattern time saving state" according to the type of jackpot, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64, or once It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessary is released by hitting the normal pattern. In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, "special symbol high probability state" and "ordinary symbol time saving state", but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, "ordinary symbol time saving state" ” may be configured as follows.

Also, the duration of the time saving state may be determined arbitrarily. For example, when the jackpot type becomes "jackpot A", the normal pattern time saving state continues until the special pattern lottery ends 30 times after the "jackpot A" ends, and when it becomes "jackpot B", the "jackpot B" After the completion, the time-saving state of the normal symbols may be continued until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 60 times. Also, instead of the number of lotteries for special symbols, the time-saving state of normal symbols may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses.

When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by turning on the power, etc., it is always set to the "low probability state of special symbols". In addition, it is not limited to this, and may be set to the "special symbol high probability state".

In addition, when the special symbol hits and shifts from "normal symbol normal state" to "normal symbol time saving state", the state will be the time saving number of special symbol lotteries after the special symbol jackpot ends (100 times) continues until it ends. On the other hand, if a new special pattern does not become a big hit before the special pattern lottery for the number of times of time saving is completed after the special pattern is hit, the game returns to the "normal state of the normal pattern". As described above, the number of time saving times is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol, and if the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the predetermined number of times is 100 times.

Then, while the "normal pattern time saving state" continues, if a new special pattern hits, the "normal pattern time saving state" is further added after the new special pattern jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery of special symbols for the number of times corresponding to the jackpot type is completed. For example, after becoming a “jackpot B” and shifting to a “normal pattern time saving state”, when it becomes “jackpot B” in the 10th special pattern lottery, the “normal pattern time saving state” is further added to the “jackpot B”. ” continues until the lottery of special symbols is performed 100 times after the end. That is, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot occurs while the "ordinary symbol time saving state" continues, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is used for a short period of time (" The duration of the time saving state of normal symbols) is updated.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the variation of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. , the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the big win type (big win A, big win B) in the case of a big win. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described. The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which main symbols with even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. Further, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols added with odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" excluding "7" are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

The display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. It is a sub-display area Ds for displaying characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. and Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice effect is performed by putting out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

In the main controller 110, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), a special symbol lottery is performed using that as a trigger. pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. A variation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 varies the third symbol according to the variation display of the first symbol display device 37. display is performed.

When the variable display of the third pattern is performed in the third pattern display device 81, first, the high-speed variable display of the third pattern is started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). After the elapse of, the display is switched to medium-speed variation display of the third symbol, and further switched to low-speed variation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win, a stop display is performed in which main patterns (third patterns) of the same number are aligned, the variable performance is finished, and then the big win performance is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, a stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are not aligned, the variable effect is completed, and if there is a pending start winning, A lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and the next variable performance is started.

The jackpot performance is divided into three periods of opening performance, round performance, and ending performance. The opening performance is intended to heighten the player's expectation by notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and notifies the player of the game value (short time period of normal symbols) to be given to the player after the end of the big win (display of short time period). Or, it is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the reserved special symbol lottery (performing a fixed effect display). In addition, in the ending production, the game value (short period of normal symbols) is notified to the player is called "short period of time display", and the lottery result becomes a big hit in the lottery of the reserved special symbols. The fact that the player is notified of this is referred to as the execution of the “fixed effect display”.

When the big win effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. An opening command is sent to the device 113 . As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the opening effect is started following the variable effect.

Next, a round number command indicating the first round is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 at the timing when the opening effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, following the opening effect, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, that state is continued until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won). Together, the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round soon comes, and a round number command indicating the second round is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 . As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, following the round effect corresponding to the first round, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started. When the second round is started, opening/closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the first round. After that, every time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113, and the opening and closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. done. Thereby, each round production from the 1st round to the 16th round is executed in order.

Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 at the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is completed 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect. As described above, in the ending effect, the player is notified of the end of the special game state, and a short-time display is performed (the game value given to the player after the end of the jackpot (a short-time period of normal symbols) is displayed in the game. (The player is notified that the lottery result will be a big hit in the pending special symbol lottery). Whether the "short-time display" is performed in the ending effect or the "fixed effect display" is performed depends on the type of the special symbol this time, the type of the special symbol that is on hold, the value of the counter (not shown), etc. selected based on

When the third symbol display device 81 performs "time short display", for example, as shown in FIG. example of information) is displayed. This screen is displayed when a lottery for special symbols is made and the result of the lottery is "jackpot B", and the time-saving state of normal symbols is displayed until the lottery for special symbols is completed 100 times after the completion of the jackpot. means to continue. When this screen is displayed, the player can easily recognize the period in which the time saving state of normal symbols is continued (short time of normal symbols).

In addition, the longer the time period of the normal pattern, the more chances the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, so the chances of the lottery for the normal pattern increase, and the chance of winning the normal pattern also increases. become more. As a result, there are more opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a jackpot of normal symbols, so that the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 and the lottery for the special symbols can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, so that a normal pattern jackpot is generated and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the first ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

On the other hand, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the “fixed effect display”, for example, “super chance!” . This screen means that the result of the lottery will always be a big win when any one of the pending special symbol lotteries is drawn. When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the reserved special symbol lottery will result in a special symbol jackpot, so that the player can be expected to surely win a special symbol jackpot. can be held. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol that is performed when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state, As a stop symbol after the end of variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 is achieved. The number of times the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. be. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of balls that pass through the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It is visible through window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Next, the passage forming member 800 provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. The passage forming member 800 is composed of a unit base assembled to the inner frame 12 and a unit cover assembled to the lower tray unit 15. By closing the lower tray unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 12, the game balls are released. It is formed in a state in which the width of the passage through which one ball can pass is secured. With such a configuration, even if ball clogging occurs in the passage forming member 800, the inside of the passage can be easily inspected simply by opening the lower tray unit 15 from the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加When adopting a configuration in which a ball passage is formed by closing a plurality of members in this way, one member has a passage surface through which the game ball passes, and the other member has another surface that constitutes the passage. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the joints of each member when passing through the ball passage and the ball flow from becoming unstable. In this embodiment, since it is possible to easily inspect the inside of the ball passage even if it is a complicated ball passage, the unit base and the unit cover are each molded with a resin molded product (polycarbonate).

It should be noted that the passage forming member 800 does not have to have the configuration described above, and may be a part of the ball passage. Further, it is sufficient that the ball passage can be configured by assembling the unit base and the unit cover, and the unit cover may be attached to the unit base.

The passage forming member 800 includes a lower tray discharge passage 800a for discharging game balls to the lower tray 50 when the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 1) is full, and a A foul ball passage 800b for ejecting a game ball (hereinafter referred to as a foul ball) that has reached the target but entered the launch path 701 again after colliding with a nail or the like to the upper tray 17, and a ball removal switch (not shown). A shot ball discharge passage 800c is formed for discharging the game ball on the shooting rail 801 to the lower tray 50 at the time of the ball extracting operation by operating . The passage forming member 800 integrally forms the lower tray discharge passage 800a, the foul ball passage 800b, and the shot ball discharge passage 800c. The parts cost can be reduced by simplification, the assembly cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts, or the parts can be formed compactly to facilitate the layout of other parts. In addition, since a plurality of passages are collectively resin-molded, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the positional relationship of each passage.

In particular, since the confluence portion where the game balls flowing down the lower tray discharge passage 800a and the game balls flowing down the shot ball discharge passage 800c are also resin-molded in advance, the game balls flowing down the lower tray discharge passage 800a have priority. It is possible to reliably and easily realize a structure in which the balls flow down to the lower tray discharge port 50a from above the shot ball discharge passage 800c.

A gap 802 of about 40 mm is formed between the launch rail 801 and the launch path 701 formed by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a foul ball dropped from this gap is received. is provided with a foul ball passage 800b. A foul ball received in the foul ball passage 800b is discharged to the upper tray 17 through the upper tray discharge port 17a.

At the right end of the passage forming member 800, a shot ball discharge passage 800c, which is a game ball passage that connects the downstream side of the shot rail 801 and the lower tray discharge port 50a, is formed. A shutter mechanism (not shown) that can be opened and closed is provided at the entrance of the shot ball discharge passage 800c, and the shutter mechanism is opened by operating a ball removal switch (not shown) provided on the upper tray 17. A game ball positioned on the adjacent launch rail is discharged to the launch ball discharge passage 800c and returned to the lower tray 50. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the foul ball passage 800b is guided to the upper tray 17, but instead of being guided to the upper tray 17, it may be guided directly to the ball shooting unit 112a. By doing so, even if a foul ball is generated, it can be quickly re-fired.

Next, of the shooting path 701 provided on the game board 13, the configuration near the foul ball entry passage 606 provided on the lower left side of the shooting path 701 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. A foul ball entry passage 606 is a passage through which a foul ball flows down, and is defined in the width direction by an outer rail 62, a guide member 605, and an entry passage forming member 607 erected on the game board 13. , the front and rear surfaces of which are defined by the glass unit 16. As shown in FIG. It is a space in which game balls branched from the launch path 701 by the second opening 604 flow down. A foul ball flowing down in the foul ball entry passage 606 enters a foul prize winning opening 601 provided in the passage. As described above, the glass unit 16 forms the front surface of the foul ball entry passage 606, so the inside of the passage can be visually confirmed. Further, by opening the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached, the inside of the passage can be easily inspected.

The second opening 604 is formed between the outer rail 62 and the guide member 605 that form the outer peripheral side of the arc-shaped firing path 701 . This second opening 604 is located on the outer peripheral side of the area where the ball is launched upward and to the left in the launch path 701 (hereinafter referred to as the lower left chord area), that is, when the foul ball flows down due to its own weight, the launch path 701 is opened. It is provided at a position (hereinafter referred to as the left lower chord position) that abuts on the outer peripheral side of the. The reason why the second opening 604 is provided at the lower left chord position is that a foul ball generated near the terminal end of the launch path 701 can enter the second opening 604 by its own weight. In addition, when the second opening 604 is provided near the end of the launch path 701, that is, in the area where the launched game ball moves upward to the right (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord area), the foul ball flows down due to its own weight. The position at which it abuts when it hits is the inner peripheral side (inner rail 61) of the launch path 701 (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord position). In this embodiment, the shooting path 701 has a left arc shape so that the game ball is shot toward the upper left. By providing the second opening 604 on the side that contacts with its own weight, it becomes possible to easily enter a foul ball.

Next, the configuration near the second opening 604 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of area II in the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. A guiding member 602 for guiding the foul ball to the second opening is provided on the second opening 604 on the side of the guiding member 605 (on the right side in FIG. 3). The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member (urethane), and its mounting base 602a is fixed to the game board 13 with screws. Since the mounting base portion 602a is covered with the protective portion 605b of the guide member 605, the game balls do not collide. The guide member 602 extends to approximately half the width of the launch path 701 to receive the foul ball, thereby preventing the foul ball from flowing down to the beginning of the launch path 701 . Also, the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a rolls on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 and then comes into contact with the guide member 602, but the tip of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 Since it is a protective part formed so as to cover the mounting base 602a of 602, the tip of the guiding member 602 comes into contact with the shot game ball. The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member, and when it comes into contact with a game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a, its tip elastically deforms in the direction of entering the foul ball entry passage 606 (dotted line in FIG. 3). (see the drawing), and the second opening 604 is partially covered. In this state, the guiding member 602 faces the second opening, and the opening width of the second opening 604 is narrowed.

Therefore, when the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a passes near the guide member 602, the guide member 602 is elastically deformed, so that the shooting power does not drop significantly. In addition, the elastic deformation of the guide member narrows the opening width of the second opening 604, so that the projectile can be smoothly shot without falling into the second opening. After the shot game ball has passed through, the guiding member 602 elastically returns to its original position.

Next, the case where the guide member 602 collides with the foul ball will be described. The leading end of the guide member 602 is configured to protrude toward the firing path 701 from a straight line connecting the inclined surface 605 a of the guiding member 605 and the starting end of the inclined surface of the outer rail 62 . Further, the outer rail 62 and the second opening 604 are formed such that the extension of the inclined surface of the outer rail 62 toward the second opening 604 faces the inside of the second opening 604 . At the location configured in this manner, a foul ball flowing down from the outer rail 62 side follows one of the following routes to enter the second opening 604 .

When entering the second opening 604 without contacting the guide member 602, the falling speed of the foul ball is reduced by the protruding part 605a to prevent the foul ball from reaching the foul winning opening 601 with its momentum, and then the foul ball is released. The player reaches the winning opening 601 . On the other hand, when entering the second opening after coming into contact with the guide member 602 , the guide member is elastically deformed in the direction of entering the firing path 701 due to the external force received from the foul ball. After the falling velocity of the foul ball is reduced by this elastic deformation, it reaches the foul winning opening 601 .

Even if the guide member 602 is elastically deformed in the direction of entering the firing path 701 due to the external force received from the foul ball, since the protective portion 605b of the guide member 605 limits the change of the guide member 602, The firing path 701 is not blocked by the external force received, and the guide member is extended only to the extent that the opening width of the second opening 604 is widened (to the extent that the gap between the guide member 602 and the protective portion 605b in FIG. 3 disappears). Only 602 is elastically deformed. Even in such an elastically deformed state, the passage width of the shooting path 701 immediately after passing the guide member 605 is such that two game balls can pass through the shooting path 701 so that the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a can pass through the shooting path 701. possible width.

By using such a configuration, it is possible to achieve both the function of receiving a foul ball and guiding it to the foul ball entry path 606 and the function of smoothly passing the game ball fired from the ball shooting unit 112a. becomes. Furthermore, since the guide member 605, which is a separate member from the guide member 602, is used to limit the elastic deformation of the guide member 602, the guide member 602 can be moved in one direction (into the foul ball entry passage 606). It is possible to eliminate the need to use complicated techniques such as making a material that is easy to change and hard to change in the other direction (the direction that blocks the launch path).

In addition, the guide member 602 is not limited to the above-described configuration, as long as it has the function of guiding the foul ball to the second opening without blocking the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a. Often, for example, the mounting base 602a has a spring structure that can rotate and return to the origin position, and a plate-like member is pivotally supported by the mounting base 602a. It can also be configured as follows.

In addition, even if it is a non-variable configuration, it is sufficient if it is a configuration that achieves the above functions. It is good also as a structure which prevents it from doing. In this embodiment, urethane is used as the elastic member, but other rubbers (silicon rubber, etc.) may be used as long as the material has excellent impact resilience. Further, the mounting position of the guide member 602 may be on the inner rail 61 side.

Inside the foul ball entry passage 606, a protrusion 605c formed integrally with the guide member 605 is provided so as to cover the foul prize winning port 601, although the details will be described later. Prevents violent collisions.

The foul ball that has flowed down the foul ball entry passage 606 enters the foul prize winning opening 601, and like the game balls that have entered the other prize winning openings, flows down the recovery passage (not shown), and then the game board 13. It is discharged to an out port (not shown) provided on the rear surface. The foul prize winning switch 208a detects a foul ball entering the foul prize winning port 601, and the result of the detection is used for prize ball payout processing (not shown) and ball abnormality determination processing (S1004 in FIG. 23), which will be described later. used for

The shot ball detection switch 208b is a proximity switch that detects a game ball that has passed through the shot path 701, and the detection result is used in the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004 in FIG. 23), which will be described later. The shot ball detection switch 208b is provided in the vicinity of the guide member 602, which is a position that allows the shot game ball to be detected and prevents the foul ball from flowing backward.

By using a switch that can also detect the direction in which the game ball passes as the shot ball detection switch 208b, it is determined whether the detected game ball is a game ball that has been shot or a foul ball that has flowed backward along the shooting path 701. Therefore, the mounting position of the shot ball detection switch 208b can be freely selected. As a switch capable of detecting the passing direction of game balls, it is provided with a passage through which the game balls pass in a row and a plurality of detecting portions provided along the passing direction of the game balls. ) is conceivable to detect the passing direction of a game ball. Specifically, it is conceivable to detect a change in magnetic field or an electric signal corresponding to a change in magnetic field.

In this embodiment, the foul ball entry path 606 is configured to form an acute angle with respect to the launch path 701 . This is a configuration for taking countermeasures against the flow of game balls in the launch path 701 and the foul prize winning opening 601, the details of which will be described later.

Here, the flow of game balls shot by the ball shooting unit 112a will be described. A game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112 a rolls on the shooting rail 801 , jumps over the gap 802 with its momentum, and rolls on the inclined surface 605 a of the guide member 605 . After that, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604, goes along the outer rail 62, passes through the first opening 603 provided with the return ball prevention member 68, and enters the game area. be launched.

Among the game balls shot by the ball shooting unit 112a, the flow of the foul balls differs depending on where the foul balls are generated. When a foul ball is generated on the terminal side of the launch path 701, it is guided into the foul ball entry passage 606 by the guiding member 602 and enters the foul prize winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entry passage. Although the details will be described later, the number of payouts (number of prize balls) based on the ball entering the foul prize winning port 601 is set to one ball, and payout control is performed based on the game ball entering the foul prize winning port 601. One game ball is put out to the upper tray 17 from the device 111 .

On the other hand, the foul ball generated on the starting end side of the launch path 701, more specifically, on the starting end side of the launch path 701 from the second opening 604 serving as the branch port to the foul ball entrance passage 606 falls into the gap 802. Then, it is returned to the upper tray 17 through the foul ball passage 800b.

In this embodiment, the foul ball is branched by the second opening 604 or the gap 802, and both are configured to supply the game ball to the upper tray 17, so the player can play the game based on the generation of the foul ball. Since the ball is supplied to the upper plate, it can be fired again as it is. In addition, since two configurations (the second opening 604 and the gap 802) for branching the foul ball are provided at different positions on the launch path 701, the foul ball can be launched from the launch path 701 on the side closer to the point where the foul ball was generated. By branching from , it is possible to shorten the period during which the foul ball stays in the launch path 701 compared to the case where there is only one configuration for branching the foul ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a vicious cycle in which a game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a collides with a foul ball staying in the shooting path 701 and a new foul ball is generated.

Furthermore, since the foul ball entry path 606 is used as a configuration for branching the foul ball from the launch path on the game board 13, it is dedicated to returning the foul ball from the game board 13 side toward the front frame 14 as in the past. There is no need to provide a passage for Therefore, on the front frame side, the limited space inside the game machine can be effectively used as a space for installing other members (for example, decorative members and frame buttons). In addition, since there is no need to provide a path dedicated to foul balls so as to communicate with the front frame 14 side on the game board 13 side, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 is increased, and the pachinko machine can improve the interest of the players. 10 can be provided.

Here, a characteristic configuration of each member provided near the firing path 701 will be described. The inclination angle of the shooting rail 801 is designed so that the game ball reaches above the lowest end of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 so that the game ball can surely jump over the gap 802 (approximately 20 degrees). The inclination angle of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 is designed to be steeper (approximately 30 degrees) than the inclination angle of the launch rail 801, and the gap 802 is positioned on the downstream extension line of the inclined surface 605a. Therefore, the foul ball flowing down on the guide member 605 falls into the gap 802 . Also, it is designed so that the shot ball rolling on the inclined surface 605 a of the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 . Specifically, an extension line A (see FIG. 4) extending in the shooting direction from the inclined surface 605a is configured to reach above the lower end of the outer rail 62. As shown in FIG.

Also, it is designed to face the second opening 604 on the extension line of the lower end of the outer rail 62 . Therefore, it is configured such that a foul ball that has flowed down along the outer rail 62 surely falls into the second opening 604 . In other words, the foul ball entry path 606 is at an acute angle with respect to the game ball launching direction (rolling direction) of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605, and the foul ball flowing down along the outer rail 62 flows downward. On the other hand, the foul ball entry passage 606 is bent with respect to the launch path 701 so that the foul ball entry passage 606 (second opening 604) is positioned on the extension thereof.

With such a configuration, the area through which the shot ball passes, the gap 802, and the second opening 604 can be provided at different positions, so that the shot ball does not fall and the foul ball does. can do. A similar effect can be obtained by providing a step in each passage.

Further, in this embodiment, the passage width of the launch path 701 is designed to be narrowed at the position where the protective portion 605b of the guide member 605 and the inner rail 61 face each other. This is to ensure that the foul ball generated at the firing path end side flows down to the foul ball entry passage 606 without flowing down to the firing path start side.

In this embodiment, the foul ball entry path 606 is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13 . This is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when dealing with a foul ball by paying out the prize ball instead of directly returning the foul ball as in the conventional art. In other words, since the game ball is paid out to the upper tray 17 by the entrance of the foul ball, the upper tray 17 (more specifically, the upper tray It is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13 above and near the point where the game balls are ejected.

As described above, by using the foul ball entry path 606 for processing foul balls within the launch path 701, there is no need to form a dedicated path for returning foul balls to the player. There is a risk that a player may illegally acquire a game ball by inserting a game ball attached to a string into a foul prize winning opening 601 provided in a foul ball entry passage 606 and manipulating the string. Therefore, a configuration for preventing the above fraud will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG.

FIG. 5(a) shows a state in which a game ball attached with a thread 610, which is a filamentous body, reaches the foul prize winning switch 208a in the foul ball entry passage 606, and FIG. 5(b) , a state after the string 610 is moved in the direction of an arrow 611 by pulling the string 610 by the player.

FIG. 5(a) shows a state in which a game ball attached with a string 610 is shot by the ball shooting unit 112a and reaches the foul winning switch 208a in the foul winning opening 601. FIG. A game ball attached with a thread 610 is thrown from the upper tray 17 in the same manner as a normal game ball, and is shot by the ball shooting unit 112a.

The string 610 used in such illegal games is thin enough not to get caught on the structure inside the ball shooting unit 112a, and is made of a material that can withstand the weight of the game ball. Specifically, piano wire, fishing line (made of nylon), cotton thread, and the like.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the foul ball entry path 606 is bent at an acute angle with respect to the game ball launching direction (rolling direction) of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605. When the game ball reaches the foul winning opening 601 (foul winning switch 208a), the thread 610 attached to the game ball is substantially V-shaped (or substantially U-shaped) (Fig. 5(a)). )reference).

In FIG. 5(a), the guide member 602 is in contact with the inner side of the substantially V-shaped thread 610, receives the load of the game ball from the thread 610, and its tip is on the side of the foul ball entry path 606. is bent into

The thread 610 is also in contact with the projection 605c of the guide member 605. As shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. The protruding portion 605a is configured to cover the foul prize winning port 601, and its tip portion (line B in FIG. 4) protrudes leftward from the end portion (line C in FIG. 4) of the foul prize winning port 601. (Line B is to the left of Line C). Therefore, part of the substantially V-shaped thread 610 comes into contact with the protrusion 605a. Line B in FIG. 4 is a vertical line that abuts on the tip position of the projection 605c, and line C in FIG. is a line.

FIG. 5(b) shows a state in which the player operates the string 610 from the state shown in FIG. 5(a), and the string 610 moves in the direction of the arrow 611 (opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball). In this state, the game ball to which the string 610 is attached is positioned above the foul winning switch 208a. In this way, by alternately repeating the states of FIG. 5(a) and FIG. 5(b), an act of illegally acquiring a game ball by detecting the winning switch multiple times using one game ball is performed. It will be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5(b), points different from FIG. 5(a) will be described. In addition to the change in the position of the game ball to which the string 610 is attached, the bending state of the guide member 602 is greatly different. This is because the guide member 602 yields to the frictional energy generated by the movement of the thread 610 and bends in the direction of movement of the thread 610 . This is because the string 610 moves in the direction opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball, so that the guide member 602 receives an external force stronger than the external force when it collides with the foul ball. It should be noted that the external force here is conceptually used as all the force that the guide member 602 receives and the force that a part of the guide member 602 receives. Among them, one point that is in contact with the thread 610 receives an external force, so that the tip of the guide member 602 is largely elastically deformed.

By elastically deforming the guide member 602 in accordance with the movement of the string 610 in this manner, the movement of the string 610 and the movement of the game ball are not interlocked, making illegal play difficult. By elastically deforming the string 610 so that the total length of the string 610 is shortened, it is possible to prevent the position of the game ball from moving even if the string 610 is pulled. Such a configuration may be a member that contracts due to the frictional energy generated by movement of the thread 610 .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the thread 610 moves, the tip of the guide member 602 bends so as to block the firing path 701. Therefore, a normal game can be played while the thread 610 is being used to cheat. Even so, the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a contacts the guide member 602 (or the string 610), and the shot game ball can be restricted from reaching the game area normally.

In addition, in this embodiment, the guide member 602 has the function of restricting the movement of the thread 610 and restricting the launch of the game ball when performing a normal game while operating the thread 610, but the guide member A new member may be used as an anti-fraud member apart from 602 .

A cutting means capable of cutting the thread 610 may be provided on the projecting portion 605c. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the thread 610 from being cut at the position where it abuts on the protrusion 605c, thereby preventing the above-described fraud. As the cutting means, it is conceivable to use frictional force and pressure when the thread 610 moves to perform the cutting. Moreover, a cutting means may be provided at a portion where the guide member is provided. By doing so, it is possible to provide the cutting means at the two locations where the thread 610 abuts, thereby making it possible to further prevent fraudulent games.

A detection switch may be provided on the projecting portion 605c so that the contact state for a predetermined time or longer can be detected. By doing so, it is also possible to monitor whether a game ball with string has entered the foul ball entry passage 606.例文帳に追加The position where such a detection switch is installed is not limited to this, and may be anywhere as long as the game ball does not come into contact with it for a long time and the string 610 comes into contact with it. In addition, a detection switch may be provided to detect that the guide member 602 is elastically deformed by the thread 610 and contacts the opposite wall (inner rail 61) of the firing path 701. A sensor for detecting the presence of the thread 610 may be provided at the portion facing the inner rail 61 . This sensor is provided with a plurality of detection units along the launch path 701, and it is sufficient if it can determine that the plurality of sensors continuously detect an object for a predetermined period or longer. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to the passage of game balls or dust adhering to the detection unit.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. The balls paid out by the payout device 133 are paid out to the upper tray 17 through the upper tray discharge port 17a by a downward ball flow path (not shown). A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 . In addition, the destination of the ball flow-down path along which the balls paid out by the payout device 133 flow down is not only the upper tray 17, but also a ball supply passage (not shown) that supplies game balls to the ball launching unit 112a, a ball It may be made to flow down to the discharge unit 112a, or a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of such paths are provided and the flow path is switched by a flow path switching mechanism. In this case, the channel switching mechanism may be operated so that only the winning balls based on the game balls that enter the foul ball winning opening 601 described above flow down to the ball supply passage or the ball shooting unit 112a. By doing so, it is possible to quickly play a game using the game ball provided by the generation of the foul ball.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment has been described above. A foul ball enters a foul winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entering passage 606. - 特許庁Then, one game ball is paid out from the payout control device 111 based on the ball entering the foul ball winning opening 601 and is given to the upper tray 17 . By using such a configuration, there is no need to provide a dedicated path for returning game balls to the upper tray 17 in response to foul balls, and the cost of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, as in the present pachinko machine 10, by using the prize ball payout mechanism based on the ball entering the winning hole, which the pachinko machine 10 has conventionally had, it is possible to achieve a greater effect.

In this embodiment, when one foul ball is detected, one prize ball is paid out. For example, in the case of a game machine that digitally manages balls in hand, a signal equivalent to one game ball may be sent to the digital. In addition, the number of game balls used and the game value of one variation of the special symbol 1 are associated in advance, the number of detected foul balls is counted, and when a predetermined number is reached, the game ball is counted. The special symbol 1 may be changed as a game value equivalent to the number.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the guide member 602 that guides the foul ball to the foul ball entry path is provided so as to be elastically deformed in the direction in which the opening width of the second opening 604 widens when it comes into contact with the foul ball. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently guide the foul ball to the foul ball entrance path. In addition, when the foul ball is not in contact with the guide member 602, the opening width of the second opening 604 is narrower than when the foul ball is in contact with the guide member 602. Therefore, the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a It is possible to make it difficult to enter the second opening 604 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the game machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, between the payout control device 111 and the main control device 110 is configured to be able to transmit and receive in both directions by a data transmission and reception circuit, but for sub control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 to the sub-controller in one direction only.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 21). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 21).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol reserved ball in the RAM 203 is updated. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 When the value of the random number for the big win set by the symbol big win random number table matches, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for when the probability of special symbols is low (the period when the probability of special symbols is low) The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table for special symbols with a high probability and the first winning random number table for special symbols with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (not shown). See FIG. 6(a)).

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol is reserved in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 9(a), in the first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the number of random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot is one, and the random number is "0". is stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, there are 10 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot when the special symbol has a high probability, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/40".

It should be noted that the random value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability are duplicate values. You may set a random value for each jackpot so that it does not become. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), by changing the random number value to be a big win, a special symbol big win is achieved. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that becomes , fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 9(b), the jackpot type is "jackpot A" when the random number is "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2. Also, when the random number is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. In addition, from the value (random number) of the first per type counter C2, the random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type is set by the first per type selection table 202b, and this table is the main control device It is provided in the ROM 202 of 110 .

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Stored in area 203a.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used by the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 10) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. there is

In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", various types of "loss super reach", "loss special reach ”Various types are defined, and as fluctuation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of “shared normal reach”, “shared super reach”, and “shared special reach” are specified. Various types of common normal reach, various types of common super reach, and various types of common special reach are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the lottery result and the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is held and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number set as the hit, it is determined as the hit of the normal design. In addition, this second hit random number table 202c is for normal design low probability (normal state period of normal design), and for high probability that normal design hit is higher than the low probability time (normal design It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state, and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 9(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability of the normal pattern, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83. is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessary attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. , the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "o" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, and further, the first ball entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 . A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 21).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 serves as a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. , various flags and counters, and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 21) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Details of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will now be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. . Details of these various tables will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG.

FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a variable probability flag 203e. , time-saving medium counter 203f, special figure fluctuation start flag 203g, entrance flag 203h, launch flag 203i, entrance ball number counter 203j, launch ball number counter 203k, timer counter 203m, timer counting flag 203n and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), each of which has a first per random number counter C1. , the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area (moved), determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In addition, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, From the obtained values of each of the counters C1 to C3, it is also possible to predict (estimate) various information obtained when the original lottery is conducted. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. are added (see S504 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S305 in FIG. 14).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S306 in FIG. 14 and S505 in FIG. 16). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the holding ball of the variable display held by the main controller 110 You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls for display command, and displays the second pattern reserved lamp indicating the number of reserved balls. 84 is turned on.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203d counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the second entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. (See S704 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 17).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of variation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second random number The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right second ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S703 in FIG. 18: No).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the variable probability flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability flag 203e has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the end of the jackpot A (variable probability jackpot) in the jackpot control process (see S1005 in FIG. 21). After that, it is set to OFF when the start of the next big win is set (S313 in FIG. 14).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the value is ON, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e is selected. is OFF, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 15).

The time-saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203f during time saving is set to zero, and 100 is set at the end of the jackpot B (time saving jackpot) in the jackpot control process (see S1005 in FIG. 21). That is, when the jackpot B is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203f.

When the lottery for the normal design is performed, the value of the time saving counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the normal design is based on the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. While the lottery is performed, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, the lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 17).

The special figure fluctuation start flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to start the special symbol fluctuation, and if the special figure fluctuation start flag 203g is on, it means that it is the timing to start the special symbol fluctuation. , and if the special figure fluctuation start flag 203g is off, it indicates that it is not the timing to start the fluctuation of the special symbol. This special figure variation start flag 203g is set to on while a variation pattern command is set in the special symbol variation start process (see S412 in FIG. 15). Then, when it is referred to in the external output process (S1001 in FIG. 21), and when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 203g is ON in the process, that is, when it is determined to be the variation start timing of the special symbol (S1101 in FIG. 22: Yes), a variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1103 in FIG. 22), and is set to OFF (see S1102 in FIG. 22).

The ball entry flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the foul prize winning port 601. If the ball entry flag 203h is on, the game ball has entered the foul prize winning port 601 and a foul prize has been won. It indicates that the game ball has been detected by the switch 208a, and if the entering ball flag 203h is off, it indicates that the game ball has not entered the foul prize winning opening 601. This ball entry flag 203h is set to ON when it is determined that the foul prize winning switch 208a is ON in the switch reading process executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (S202 in FIG. 13). . Then, it is referred to in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of main controller 110 (see S1206 in FIG. 23), and when it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1206 in FIG. 23: Yes ), the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1207 in FIG. 23), and set to OFF (S1208 in FIG. 23).

That is, the ball entry flag 203h is set to ON based on the game ball entering the foul winning hole 601, and the main processing of the main controller 110 is based on whether or not the ball entry flag 203h is ON. Thus, it becomes possible to execute processing when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 .

The shooting flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has been shot. If the shooting flag 203i is on, it indicates that the game ball has been shot and the game ball has been detected by the shooting ball detection switch 208b. If the shooting flag 203i is off, it indicates that the game ball has not been shot. This shooting flag 203i is set to ON when it is determined that the ball launch detection switch 208b is ON in the switch reading process executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (see S206 in FIG. 13). . Then, it is referred to in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S1209 in FIG. 23), and when it is determined that the firing flag 203i is ON (S1209 in FIG. 23: Yes), The shot ball number counter 203k is incremented by 1 and turned off (S1211 in FIG. 23).

That is, the shooting flag 203i is set to ON based on the game ball being shot, and in the main processing of the main controller 110, the game ball is shot based on whether the shooting flag 203i is ON. It is possible to execute the processing in the case of

The number-of-entered-balls counter 203j counts a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds), it is a counter used to count the number of game balls entering the foul winning hole 601 . This ball entry counter 203j is incremented by 1 when the ball entry flag 203h is ON in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 23). S1207 reference). Then, after the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) has elapsed (S1216: Yes in FIG. 23), or after it is determined to be abnormal and error processing is executed (after execution of S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23), It is reset to 0 (see S1217 in FIG. 23).

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the number of entering balls counter 203j is greater than a predetermined value Y (10 in this embodiment) during the abnormal entering ball determination period (20 seconds) (Fig. 23 S1214: Yes), error processing is executed (see S1215 in FIG. 23). Here, the predetermined value Y (10) is set to a value that does not enter the foul prize winning opening 601 within a predetermined time (20 seconds) if the player intends to play the game normally. there is Therefore, if the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter exceeds the predetermined value Y (10) within a predetermined time (20 seconds) after the game ball enters the foul winning hole 601, the player can normally play the game. It is considered that an illegal act such as illegally entering a foul winning hole 601 is being executed. Therefore, in this case, error processing is executed as described above, and it is configured to be able to notify that an illegal act is being executed.

The shot ball counter 203k counts a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds), among the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a, among the game balls that have passed the shooting ball detection switch 208b, that is, among the game balls shot by the ball shooting unit 112a, a gap 802 is formed due to a shooting failure or the like. It is a counter used to count game balls other than game balls that have fallen to the ground (hereafter referred to as normally fired game balls). This shot number counter 203k is incremented by 1 when the above-described shot flag 203i is ON in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of main controller 110 (S1210 in FIG. 23). ). Then, after the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) has elapsed (S1216: Yes in FIG. 23), or after it is determined to be abnormal and error processing is executed (after execution of S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23), 0 (see S1217 in FIG. 23).

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), the number of ball entry counters is greater than the value obtained by adding a predetermined value X (2 in this embodiment) to the value of the number counter 203k of ball entry. When the value of 203j is large, that is, as a result of comparing the number of game balls that have been launched normally and the number of game balls that have entered the foul prize winning port 601, the number of game balls that have entered the foul prize winning port 601 is 2. If it is determined that there are more than balls (more than three balls) (S1212 in FIG. 23: Yes), error processing is executed (S1213 in FIG. 23).

In this ball entry abnormality determination processing, it is detected that the number of winning balls into a specific winning hole is larger than the number of shot balls, which cannot occur in a normal game, and the specific winning hole (foul winning hole 601) is detected. It is possible to monitor that a fraudulent act such as illegally entering a game ball into a ball is being performed.

Here, the reason why the predetermined value X is provided in the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the foul winning hole 601, the ball entry abnormality determination is started, and the shot ball number counter 203k and the ball entry counter 203j are counted. For this reason, the game ball that triggers the start of the entering ball abnormality determination is not counted by the shot ball number counter 203k. Also, at the timing when the ball entry abnormality determination is started, the game ball that has already been shot by the ball shooting unit 112a remains in the shooting passage 701, and the possibility that the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 is considered. be done. In consideration of such an expected error, a predetermined value X is set so that error processing is executed when an obvious abnormal state is detected. As a result, in the above-described case where the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than the value of the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k even though no fraudulent act has been executed, error processing is not executed. Unnecessary error notification can be suppressed. Note that the predetermined value X is not limited to the value described above, and may be a value smaller than 2 (eg 1) or a value larger than 2 (eg 5). Also, the predetermined value X may not be set.

Here, in the ball entry abnormality determination process, the entry ball number counter 203j and the shot ball number counter 203k are added because the ball entry flag 203h is turned on based on the game ball entering the foul winning hole 601. This is the case when the timer counting flag 203n is turned on. As a result, it is possible to execute the counting process by the entering ball number counter 203j and the firing number counter 203k necessary for the abnormality determination only during the entrance abnormality determination period (20 seconds), so that the game can be played outside the entrance abnormality determination period. machine processing load can be reduced. It should be noted that the number of shots counter 203k may be configured such that the count process is always performed, and the number of balls counted during the period during which the ball entry abnormality determination is performed is taken out.

Further, in the present embodiment, the incoming ball number counter 203j and the fired ball number counter 203k are configured to be added in the processing executed in the main processing of the main controller 110, but this is not the only option. It may be configured to add in other processing such as processing executed in interrupt processing of the device 110 .

The timer counter 203m counts a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds). The predetermined time is not limited to 20 seconds, and may be set to 10 seconds, which is shorter than this, or 30 seconds, which is longer, and can be changed by changing the value set in the timer counter 203m. there is

The timer counter 203m is set to 5000 (in 20 seconds) when the timer counting flag 203n is off and the ball entering flag 203h is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110. equivalent) is set (S1204 in FIG. 23). Then, when the timer counting flag 203m is ON, 1 is decremented each time the ball entry abnormality determination process is executed (S1202 in FIG. 23), and when the timer counter 203m becomes 0 (FIG. 23 S1216: Yes), the process after the predetermined time has elapsed is executed (see S1217 to S1218 in FIG. 23). Here, since the ball entry abnormality determination process is a process executed every 4 ms in the main process of the main controller 110, the timer counter 203m is decremented by 1 every 4 ms. That is, when 5000 is set in the timer counter 203m, it becomes 0 after 20 seconds, and processing is executed after a predetermined time (20 seconds) has elapsed (see S1217 to S1218 in FIG. 23).

In addition, the timer counter 203m is determined to be abnormal during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), and when error processing is executed (when S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is executed), a predetermined time ( 20 seconds), it is reset to 0 after the execution of the error processing because the ball entry abnormality determination is terminated.

The timer counting flag 203n is set during the period during which ball entry abnormality determination is performed in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (a predetermined time after the game ball enters the above-described foul winning opening 601). ). The timer counting flag 203n is set to the above-described timer counting flag 203n when the timer counting flag 203n is off and the ball entering flag 203h is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110. The counter 203m is set and turned on (see S1205 in FIG. 23). Then, it is referred to every time the ball entry abnormality determination process is executed (S1201 in FIG. 23), and is set to OFF when the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) elapses and the timer counter 203m becomes 0. (S1218 in FIG. 23). Further, when it is determined that there is an abnormality during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) and error processing is executed (when S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is executed), the predetermined time (20 seconds) has elapsed. , the timer counter 203m is turned off after error processing is executed (S1218 in FIG. 23).

The other memory area 203z is for setting (storing) other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Next, details of the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. .

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(a)) is, as described above, a table in which values of random numbers that are special symbol jackpots are defined. When the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, the first random number table 202a includes a table (first random number table 202a for low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit when the probability of the special symbol is low, and a high probability of the special symbol. A table (first winning random number table 202a for high probability) is provided for determining whether or not a special pattern is a jackpot at the time of probability, and the number of random numbers to be a jackpot included in each table is different. there is In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9B) is set so that the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be selected. Specifically, as the judgment value of the big win A, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to "0 to 49", and as the judgment value of the big win B is set to "50 to 99".

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 9(c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is "5 to 28". In the case of the range of , it is determined that the normal design hits. In addition, when the probability of the normal design is high (during the time saving state of the normal design), when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number buffer counter is in the range of "5 to 204", the normal design judged to be hit. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory is opened only for a predetermined time.

Next, details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10(a)) is a data table used for determining the display form of the fluctuation pattern, and the display form is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10(a), a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10(b)), a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(c)), At least a deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10(d)) is defined. Although not shown, in addition to this, a variation pattern table in the time saving game state and a variation pattern table according to the values stored in the special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a are set.

Next, the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 10(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big hit. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 10(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for failure. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 10(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and an external output terminal plate 261 are connected. Sends various commands and control signals to

The input/output port 205 includes the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111, a foul winning switch 208a, a shot ball detection switch 208b, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group 208c (not shown), and a power supply device. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to the touch sensor 51a provided in the operation handle 51 via the input/output port 215 and the firing control device 112, the stop switch 51, and the operation amount detection switch. 51c, signals output from various switches 208, and RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the firing controller 112, the external output terminal plate 261, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

As described above, the external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111, and receives signals from the respective input/output ports. The signals to be received include, for example, an abnormality signal indicating an abnormality in the main controller 110, an error signal indicating a state determined as an error by the processing performed in the main controller 110, and detection of winning in the main controller 110. and a prize ball payout signal indicating that the payout control device 111 has paid out the prize balls.

In this embodiment, the winning detection signal and prize ball payout signal based on the detection result of the foul winning switch 208b provided in the foul ball winning opening 601, which is the winning opening into which the foul ball enters, are applied to various winning openings provided in other winning openings. It is configured to be output separately from the prize winning detection signal and prize ball payout signal based on the detection result of the switch. This is because when analyzing the game results of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the hall computer, the ratio between the total number of game balls used (out total number) and the total number of game balls paid out (safe total number) is generally calculated. This is because calculation (base calculation) is performed, but if the number of prize balls paid out based on foul balls that have not been used in the game is added, it becomes impossible to calculate an accurate base value. Therefore, the hall computer has a different output mode so that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on foul balls can be eliminated.

These signals are transmitted from each control device (110, 111) to corresponding ports among a plurality of ports provided for receiving signals provided on the external output terminal board 261. FIG. Signals received at each port are referenced by hall computer 262 . In this embodiment, a plurality of ports corresponding to various signals are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and identifiers may be added to various signals and transmitted/received through one port. It is possible to identify which information the received signal indicates by the identifier. As a result, the number of ports provided on the external output terminal plate 261 can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

When the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot a ball, the shooting control device 112 shoots the ball with a launch strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 detected by the operation amount detection switch 51c. It controls the unit 112a. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls display such as audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting and extinguishing output from the lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable effects (variable display). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the device 114, and the like. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222. FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a.

In the fluctuation pattern table 222a, fluctuation patterns corresponding to the types of fluctuation patterns (off, reach out, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol pending ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a power interruption processing flag 223x, and a power interruption flag. 223y and another memory area 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It's becoming

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 203c, its value can be updated.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and lighting of the LED indicating the reserved ball number (not shown). That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, performs lighting control of the LED, and after storing In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 Drawing of the image is controlled so that the pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 26), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (see S1602 in FIG. 27). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S1402) of the main processing (see FIG. 25), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 26), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S1607 in FIG. 27).

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, power cutoff processing flag 223x sends a power cutoff command to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is set. It is set to ON, and power-off processing is executed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). Then, when the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag 223x is set to off (see S1417 in FIG. 25). This power-off processing in-progress flag 223x is referred to in the start-up processing (see S1302 in FIG. 24), and if it is on, the power has been turned off during execution of the power-off processing (that is, the RAM has been destroyed). Then, without checking for RAM destruction, the processing in the case of RAM destruction is executed.

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, a power cutoff command is sent to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is turned on. The setting is made, and power-off processing is executed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). Then, in the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 24), if the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared, and the power-off flag 223y is set off (S1310 in FIG. 24). reference).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 26) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) is controlled. Since this display control device 114 is a well-known device, its detailed description is omitted.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 12 to 23. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches (foul winning switch 208a, shot ball detection switch 208b, etc.) connected to the main controller 110, and executes processing according to the states of the switches. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the passage of the ball through the second entrance (through gate) 67 is controlled. Through gate passage processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, the switch reading process (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing this switch reading process (S101). This switch reading process (S101) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), reads the states of various switches connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control unit 110, and changes the states of the various switches. This is the process for executing the process according to the request.

In this switch reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the foul winning switch 208a is on (S201). The foul prize winning switch 208a is turned on when a game ball enters the foul prize winning port 601 and passes through the foul prize winning switch 208a. In the processing of S201, if it is determined that the foul prize winning switch 208a is on (S201: Yes), the ball entry flag 203h is set to ON (S202), the foul prize winning command is set (S203), and the foul prize winning command is set (S203). Go to processing.

By setting the ball entry flag 203h to ON in the process of S202, the game ball enters the foul winning hole 601 in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) executed in the main process of the main controller 110. can be detected. Also, the foul winning command set in the process of S203 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is , and is transmitted to the payout control device 111 . When the payout control device 111 receives the foul winning command, it controls the payout motor 216 so as to pay out the number of game balls (one ball in this embodiment) corresponding to the command.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, if it is determined that the foul prize winning switch 208a is off (S201: No), the processing of S202 and S203 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S204.

After completing the process of S201 or S203, it is determined whether or not the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S204). The timer counting flag 203n is turned on when it is determined that the ball entry flag is on (S1204 in FIG. 23) in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later. The ON state is continued until the period for judging the abnormality of ball entry (ball entry abnormality judgment period) elapses. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the ball entry abnormality determination period is set to 20 seconds. If it is determined in S204 that the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S204: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the shot ball detection switch 208b is ON (S205). The shot ball detection switch 208b is turned on when a game ball is shot and passes the shot ball detection switch 208b. In the process of S205, if it is determined that the shot ball detection switch 208b is ON (S205: Yes), the shot flag 203i is set to ON (S206), and the process proceeds to S207.

That is, when the game ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch 208b while the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S205: Yes), the shot flag 203i is set to ON (S206). ). As a result, the state of the shot ball detection switch can be read only during the period during which the ball entry abnormality determination is performed in which the number of shot balls must be counted, so that the processing load can be reduced. It should be noted that when counting the number of shot balls or detecting shot balls in other processing, the state of the shot ball detection switch is read even outside the ball entry abnormality determination period. good too.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is not ON (S204: No) and if it is determined that the shot ball detection switch 208b is not ON (S205: No), S206 Skip the process and move to the process of S207.

In the process of S207, other switch reading process is executed (S207). Other switches include, for example, detecting the entry of a ball into the above-described various ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 67) and various winning entrances (general winning entrance 63, specific winning entrance 65a). A touch sensor 51a, a stop switch 51b, and an operation amount detection switch 51c, which are input via the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, are included. When the ball sensor detects the entry of a game ball into various ball entrances or various winning holes, detection information (winning detection information) is stored based on the ball entering hole or winning hole. The winning detection information stored here is referred to in the external output process (see FIG. 22) executed in the main process of the main controller 110, and a prize ball command based on the winning detection information is transmitted to the payout control device 111. As a result, prize balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance or the prize winning opening. Also, based on the detection results of the touch sensor 51a, the stop switch 51b, and the operation amount detection switch 51c, it transmits a launch permission signal and a launch instruction signal to the launch control device.

The above-described various switches 208 (foul winning switch 208a, shot ball detection switch 208b, and other switches 208c) are set to OFF after being read in the switch reading process. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by continuously reading the states of the switches.

Further, in this embodiment, whether or not a game ball has entered the foul winning hole 601 is detected by the above-described switch reading process executed every 2 ms. That is, by detecting the state of the foul winning switch 208a every 2 ms, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, it takes 2 ms or longer for one game ball to pass through the foul winning switch 208a. Therefore, while the state of the foul prize winning switch 208a is detected by the switch reading process (for 2 ms), two or more game balls pass through the foul prize winning switch 208a, and the number of passing game balls cannot be calculated. ) can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 is configured to detect the state of the foul winning switch 208a, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it detect by the process of . Also, the interval for detecting the state of the foul prize winning switch 208a may be appropriately changed according to the time required for one game ball to pass through the foul prize winning switch 208a.

Further, the foul winning switch 208a of the present embodiment is configured to output a signal for each game ball even when game balls pass in a row. Specifically, the foul winning switch 208a is formed with a through hole (12 mm in diameter) that is one size larger than the game ball (11 mm in diameter), and has a structure in which two game balls cannot pass through at the same time. Therefore, when the game balls pass in a row, the game balls pass in a row in the horizontal direction with respect to the passing direction. Here, the foul prize winning switch 208a is provided with a detection section that detects a magnetic field that changes when a game ball passes through and outputs an electric signal corresponding to the magnitude of the magnetic field. The changing magnetic field changes according to the volume of the game ball in the detection range of the detection unit, and the detection range of the detection unit is narrower than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) in the passing direction of the game ball. It is configured to be a range. As a result, the magnetic field changes from "weak" to "strong" each time one game ball passes through, and then changes to "weak" again. As a result, even if the game balls pass in a row, the magnetic field (the electric signal corresponding to the magnetic field) changes to "weak" each time one ball passes, so the game balls pass in a row. Even in this case, the passage of game balls can be detected for each ball and a signal can be output.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S301). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S302: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of times N of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is acquired (S303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S304), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S304: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S304: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S305), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S306). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 21), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S306, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S307). In the process of S307, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S308). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S302, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S309). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S309: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S309, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S309: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S310). The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S308), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S310 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot (S311). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S311: Yes), jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S312). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S313), and the process proceeds to S316.

In the process of S311, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S311: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S314), and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 If it is above (S314: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203f (S315), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S314: No), the process of S315 is skipped and the process proceeds to S316.

After completing the process of S313 or S315, a stop command is set (S316), and the process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the stop command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes processing for stopping the variable display being executed with the stop type received by the stop type command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol variation start process (S308) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S308). This special symbol variation start process (S308) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S401).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S402). If the variable probability flag 203e is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state with special symbols, and if the value of the variable probability flag 203e is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state with special symbols.

If the value of the variable probability flag 203e is on (S402: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401 and the value for the high probability time (S403), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table. Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

On the other hand, in the process of S402, if the variable probability flag 203e is off (S402: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401 and , based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S404). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. One of "0" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. Determine that there is. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S403 or S404 is a special symbol jackpot (S405), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S405: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S406). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, It is determined what the jackpot type is among the jackpots B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot It is determined to be B (16R time-saving jackpot) (see FIG. 9(b)).

In the process of S406, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S407). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S407, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the big winning symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the variation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing special reach" are defined. , As a variation pattern for the jackpot, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified. Various types of "super reach" and various types of "common special reach" are defined.

In the process of S405, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S405: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S408). In the process of S408, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S409). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S407, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

When the process of S407 or the process of S409 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S407 or S409 is set (S410). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S406 or S408 is set (S411). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 21). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S411 ends, the special symbol variation start flag 203g indicating that it is time to start the special symbol variation is set to ON (S412), and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

By the special symbol variation start flag 203g set in the process of S412, it is determined that it is the variation start timing of the special symbol in the external output process (see FIG. 22) (see S1101 of FIG. 22), and the variation start timing of the special symbol (S1101 in FIG. 22: Yes), the variation pattern command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in S4010 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. (See S1103 in FIG. 22). The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command based on the received variation pattern command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the variation effect based on the received command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a start winning , is a process for executing pending processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is obtained (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S503: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and other commands executed in external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. In the process (see S1108 in FIG. 22), it is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S505, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) (S506), and the process ends. In the processing of S506, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In addition, in this starting winning process, the lottery result of the special symbol may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in advance from the values indicated by the various random number counters obtained based on the starting winning. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect based on the result of the lottery after the change, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 17, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and controls the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory, and the like. This is a process for

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the moment when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the moment when the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is being performed. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203f during time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). Incidentally, the time-saving medium counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols.

When the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning hole 65a. However, when the motorized accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 is opened, the ball that was intended to enter the specific prize winning opening 65 a enters the first ball entrance 64 . Therefore, it is intended to prevent the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 from being opened, thereby making it easier for the specific winning opening 65a to win. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the first ball-entering hole 64, even if the ball is prevented from entering the first ball-entering hole 64 during the special symbol jackpot, the first ball-entering hole 65a Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. - 特許庁As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64 becomes maximum (4 times).

In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not in effect (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 9(c)).

In the process of S608, when the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S608:No), it transfers to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low Based on the second winning random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 9(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S612: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is set to light up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is a special symbol jackpot. (S615). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening the electric accessary and the opening time are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so the first ball entrance. 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S614:No), it transfers to the process of S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the opening period of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 is set to 0. 2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the second symbol display device 83 changes The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. becomes easy.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 21) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 21) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed. is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second ball inlet 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of variable display in the normal symbol is reserved) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the process of S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 21), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001).

Here, the details of the external output processing (S1001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the external output process (S1001). This external output process (S1001) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 21), and is based on the presence or absence of various flags and winning detection information set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). It is a process for processing.

In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation start flag 203g is ON (S1101). In the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the special symbol variation start flag 203g is ON (S1101: Yes), it becomes the timing to start the variation of the special symbol, and the above-described special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 15) varies. Since the pattern command is set, the special variation start flag 203g is set to OFF (S1102), and the variation pattern command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1103). ). Then, the process proceeds to S1104.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 203g is off (S1101: No), since it is not the timing to start the variation of the special symbol, the processing of S1102 and S1103 is skipped, The process proceeds to S1104.

In the process of S1104, it is determined whether or not there is a foul winning command (S1104), and if it is determined that there is a foul winning command (S1104: Yes), the foul winning command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. At the same time, a signal is output to the terminal corresponding to the foul ball winning command of the external output terminal board 261 (S1105). When the payout control device 111 receives the foul winning command, the payout motor 216 is controlled to pay out a prize ball (one ball in this embodiment) corresponding to the command. On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that there is no foul winning command (S1104: No), the process of S1105 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1106.

In the process of S1106, it is determined whether or not there is an error command (S1106), and if it is determined that there is an error command (S1106: Yes), the error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the external A signal is output to the terminal corresponding to the error command on the output terminal board 261 (S1107). Here, the error command includes an error command (S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23) that is set in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later. The destination of the error command may be changed according to the type of the error command. For example, an error command for stopping the payout of prize balls may be sent to the payout control means 111. . Thus, by transmitting an error command for stopping the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 111 when fraud is detected, the payout by the payout control device 111 can be stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1106 that there is no error command (S1106: No), the process of S1107 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1108.

In the process of S1108, commands other than the commands described above are transmitted. As a command other than the above-described commands, for example, based on the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 12), if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is notified of the number of winning balls. Send prize ball command. In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 16). Further, the winning information command set in the startup winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, when the variation pattern command is transmitted by the processing of S1103 described above, after that, a stop type command for stopping the variation display of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. .

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. After finishing the processing of S1001, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is then updated (S1002). Specifically, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the first variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the game ball is illegally entered into the foul winning hole 601. A ball entry abnormality determination process for detecting fraud is executed (S1004).

Details of the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004). This ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the number of game balls that have been launched and the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning hole 601 are determined. This is a process for detecting an abnormal ball entry into the foul prize winning opening 601 or a fraudulent act based on the above.

In the ball entry abnormality determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S1201). The timer counting flag 203n is set to ON by the process of S1205, which will be described later, and is set to OFF after a predetermined time (20 seconds in this embodiment) has passed (S1218). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S1201: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the timer counter 203m for measuring the predetermined time, and the process proceeds to S1206.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is off (S1201: No), the entering ball flag 203h is on in order to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. It is determined whether or not there is (S1203). In the process of S1203, if it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is not ON (S1203: No), no game ball has entered the foul winning hole 601, and it is not the period during which ball entry abnormality determination is performed. End the process.

In the processing of S1203, if it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1203: Yes), the timer counter 203m is set to 5000 (equivalent to 20 seconds) to start the judgment of abnormal entry ( S1204), the timer counting flag 203n is set to ON (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

After completing the process of S1202 or S1205, it is determined whether or not the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1206). In the process of S1206, if it is determined that the ball entering flag 203h is ON (S1206: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the foul winning hole 601 during the ball entering abnormality determination period, so the number of entering balls is The counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1207), the entering ball flag 203h is set to OFF (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1206 that the entering ball flag 203h is off (S1206: No), the processes of S1207 and S1208 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1209.

In the processing of S1209, it is determined whether or not the firing flag 203i is ON (S1209). In the process of S1209, if it is determined that the shooting flag 203i is ON (S1209: Yes), it means that a game ball has been shot during the ball entry abnormality determination period, so the number of shot balls counter 203k is incremented by 1. (S1210), the firing flag 203i is set to OFF (S1211), and the process proceeds to S1212. On the other hand, in the processing of S1209, when it is determined that the firing flag 203i is off (S1209: No), the processing of S1210 and S1211 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1212.

Next, based on the entered ball number counter 203j corresponding to the number of game balls entered into the foul winning hole 601 and the shot ball number counter 203k corresponding to the number of fired game balls, a ball entry abnormality is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball-in counter 203j is greater than the value obtained by adding a predetermined value X (2 in this embodiment) to the value of the ball-in counter 203k (S1212). In the processing of S1212, as a result of comparing the number of game balls that have been normally shot with the number of game balls that have entered the foul prize winning opening 601, the game balls that have entered the foul prize winning opening 601 have been successfully shot. It is determined whether or not there are 2 more balls (more than 3 balls) than the game balls. If it is determined that there are many (S1212: Yes), an error command is set (S1213), assuming that an illegal act such as illegally entering a game ball into the foul winning opening 601 has been performed. The process proceeds to S1217.

Here, the reason why the predetermined value X is provided in the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the foul winning hole 601, the ball entry abnormality determination is started, and the shot ball number counter 203k and the ball entry counter 203j are counted. For this reason, the game ball that triggers the start of the entering ball abnormality determination is not counted by the shot ball number counter 203k. Also, at the timing when the ball entry abnormality determination is started, the game ball that has already been shot by the ball shooting unit 112a remains in the shooting passage 701, and the possibility that the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 is considered. be done. In consideration of such an expected error, a predetermined value X is set so that error processing is executed when an obvious abnormal state is detected. As a result, in the above-described case where the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than the value of the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k even though no fraudulent act has been executed, error processing is not executed. Unnecessary error notification can be suppressed. Note that the predetermined value X is not limited to the value described above, and may be a value smaller than 2 (eg 1) or a value larger than 2 (eg 5). Also, the predetermined value X may not be set.

The error command set in the process of S1213 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described external output process (see FIG. 22), and a signal is output to the corresponding terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command. be done. As a result, upon receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 can output sound and display a screen suggesting that the number of foul winnings is greater than the number of shot balls. In addition, since the signal output to the external output terminal plate 261 is detected by the hall computer 262, it is possible to inform hall employees or the like through the hall computer 262 that the number of foul winnings is greater than the number of shot balls. can.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1212 that there are not many (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than 10 (S1214). If the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than a predetermined value Y (10 in this embodiment) (S1214: Yes), the number of game balls entered into the foul winning hole 601 is greater than the number of game balls that have been shot. This is the case where the number of balls entering the foul winning hole 601 is large, although the number of balls does not increase. Here, when playing a game, if the player intends to play the game normally, more than 10 game balls do not enter the foul winning hole 601 within a predetermined time (20 seconds). Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1217.

The error command set by the process of S1215 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described external output process (see FIG. 22), and a signal is output to the corresponding terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command. be done. Thus, upon receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 can output sound and display a screen indicating that the number of foul winnings is large. In addition, since the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is detected by the hall computer 262, it is possible to inform hall employees or the like through the hall computer 262 that the number of foul winnings is large.

In the process of S1214, if it is determined that the number of entered balls counter 203j is equal to or less than the predetermined value Y (10) (S1214: No), a timer It is determined whether or not the counter 203m is 0 (S1216). If it is determined that the timer counter 203m is 0 (S1216: Yes), it is time to end the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), so the process proceeds to S1217, and it is determined that the timer counter 203m is not 0. If so (S1216: No), the ball entry abnormality determination is continued, so this process ends.

When the processing of S1213, S1215 or S1216 is completed, various counter values are reset (S1217). Specifically, when an error command is set by the processing of S1213 or S1215, or when it is determined that the timing of the end of the abnormal entrance determination period is reached by the processing of S1216 (S1216: Yes), the abnormal entrance determination is performed. In order to end the process, the incoming ball number counter 203j, the fired ball number counter 203k and the timer counter 203m are reset to zero. Next, the timer counting flag 203n is set to OFF (S1218), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004) of the present embodiment, an error command is set when an abnormality is determined during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds). . Thereby, the occurrence of an abnormality can be detected early. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, it may be configured to determine whether or not there is an abnormality after the passage of the entrance abnormality determination period (20 seconds). In this case, since the abnormality can be determined after acquiring the information necessary for the abnormality determination for the entrance abnormality determination period (20 seconds), the accuracy of the abnormality determination can be improved, and unnecessary abnormality notification can be performed. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 and the number of game balls that have been shot are counted in the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be counted in other processing such as processing executed in timer interrupt processing.

In addition, the method of determining abnormality in ball entry is not limited to the methods and combinations described above. etc. may be added. Another abnormality determination is, for example, a case in which the interval at which game balls enter the foul prize winning opening 601 is earlier on average than the interval at which game balls can be shot (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). etc.

Further, the trigger for starting the ball entry abnormality determination is not limited to the entry of the game ball into the foul winning opening 601, and may be measured at predetermined time intervals, for example.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine an abnormality by counting the game balls that have entered the foul winning prize opening 601 and the game balls that have been fired. 1 ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 67, etc.) or the out port 66 may be counted to determine the abnormality. For example, the count number of game balls that entered the foul winning opening 601 and the count number of game balls that hit the game area without entering the foul winning opening 601 with respect to the count number of fired game balls. may be judged to be abnormal when the total value of .

Furthermore, if there is a continuous entry into the foul winning hole 601 and the ball entry abnormality determination is executed again (when the entry abnormality determination period starts again after the entrance abnormality determination period ends), the fraudulent act will occur. likely to be done. On the other hand, when the entering ball abnormality determination period starts immediately after the start of the game, there is a high possibility that the player erroneously made a foul winning when he started hitting. Therefore, in the first ball entry abnormality determination after the start of the game, the threshold value for determining that the ball entry abnormality is determined to be high (for example, 15 or more balls are determined to be abnormal in S1214) to make the abnormality determination difficult. In the abnormal ball entry determination, the threshold for determining abnormal ball entry may be set low (for example, 5 or more balls are determined to be abnormal in S1214) to make it easier to make an abnormal determination. This makes it possible to accurately detect fraud while suppressing unnecessary error reporting. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to increase the number of determination items for determination of ball entry abnormality from the first time onward (for example, the first time is determined by S1212 only, and the first transition is determined by S1212 and S1214). The thresholds and determination items may be changed step by step in subsequent ball entry abnormality determination. Also, after the timer counter reaches 0 (S1216: Yes in FIG. 23), the number of entering ball counters increases from a predetermined value Y (10 in this embodiment) while the timer count flag is on (during the period for determining abnormality in entering balls). A process of determining whether or not the number is greater than a small predetermined value Z (eg, 5) may be added. Through these processes as well, it is possible to improve the effect of being able to accurately detect fraud while suppressing unnecessary error reporting.

Also, in the present embodiment, only one error command is set, but error commands may be set in a plurality of stages according to the degree of possibility that an illegal game is being played. In such a case, in addition to the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process, determination may be made using a pattern in which the determination value (determination value) is set low. By doing so, in addition to outputting that an illegal game is being played, a slight error command such as a situation in which the player has erroneously operated the operating handle 51 or a malfunction of the operating handle 51 can be set. , to the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to give a game explanation ("Please turn the operation handle more") by voice or liquid crystal display, or to notify a malfunction of the operation handle.

Specifically, the timing at which the player operates the operation handle 51 to change the firing intensity (at the start of the game, at the start of the right-handed hitting game, at the end of the right-handed hitting game, etc.) is set as the timing at which the abnormal entry process is started. , and counts the number of game balls entering the foul prize winning opening 601 during a predetermined period. If the counted value is greater than a predetermined value, there is a possibility that the launcher may be malfunctioning, so an output to that effect is made possible. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible not only to monitor fraudulent games, but also to determine malfunctions of the operating handle 51.例文帳に追加Incidentally, when performing both defect determination of the operation handle 51 and monitoring of illegal games, it is preferable to store a plurality of determination results of the ball entry abnormality determination process in time series and perform determination. In other words, if a ball enters the foul prize winning opening 601 due to a malfunction of the operating handle 51, it will occur repeatedly unless the operating handle 51 is repaired. because it occurs within a specified period of time.

Desirably, the determination value for the abnormal entry determination based on the illegal game is strict and the period used for the determination is shortened, and the abnormality determination based on the malfunction of the operation handle 51 It is preferable that the determination value for determination is sweeter than the value for determination of illegal game and the period used for determination is lengthened. By doing so, both can be determined.

Also, the timing of changing the firing intensity is the timing at which the abnormal ball entry process is started. The reason why the predetermined time has passed is that it prevents the detection of game balls that have been shot before the firing intensity is changed, and also prevents game balls that have been shot before the firing intensity is changed and the firing intensity is changed. This is to prevent the game ball from reaching an unintended area and detecting such a game ball by colliding with the game ball launched after being hit.

The timing for judging the malfunction of the operating handle 51 is not limited to the timing described above, and may be performed at all times, or may be performed during a state in which a firing instruction is given so that the firing intensity is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

In addition, it is preferable to change the content of notification to the outside when a malfunction of the operation handle is determined according to the game state (whether or not a big win is in progress, etc.). For example, if the jackpot is in progress, it is preferable to raise the notification priority so that the store clerk will come to the store as soon as possible. The process of changing the content of notification in this way may be performed by the main controller using information based on the determination result of the abnormal ball entry determination and information based on the gaming state of the gaming machine, or may be performed by the main controller using voice obtained by acquiring each information. The lamp controller may do this. Furthermore, a storage means may be provided for storing information based on the fact that the malfunction of the operating handle is determined during the jackpot.

In the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process, the number of balls entered into the foul winning opening 601 is counted, and the ball entry abnormality determination is performed based on the counting result. It is also conceivable to perform such control.

That is, the entry flag 203h and the launch flag 203i may be constantly read from the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and entry abnormality determination may be performed based on the timing at which each flag is turned on.

Specifically, when the ball entry flag 203h is turned on while the shooting flag 203i is not turned on, it is determined that the ball entry is abnormal. This determines the state in which the game ball has entered the foul prize winning opening 601 although the game ball has not been shot.

In addition, since it takes a predetermined time (approximately 2 seconds) from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the foul winning hole 601, the firing flag 203i is turned on a predetermined time before the timing when the firing flag 203i is turned on. It is preferable to determine whether or not. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably determine the ball entry abnormality.

Furthermore, at the timing when the game ball is entered into the foul prize winning opening 601, that is, at the timing when the ball entry flag 203h is turned on, timing of a predetermined time is started, and until the predetermined time (0.6 seconds) elapses, It is preferable to determine that the game ball has entered the foul winning hole 601 . By doing so, it is possible to detect the state in which the game ball enters the foul prize winning opening 601 at a timing shorter than the game ball shooting interval (0.6 seconds) by the operation handle 51 .

It should be noted that when foul balls are generated continuously, it is conceivable that the foul balls are strung together in the launch path 701, so the predetermined time may be set as appropriate, and may be shorter than 0.6 seconds. Further, it is also possible to determine whether the game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 multiple times within a predetermined period of time. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of monitoring fraudulent games.

In addition, a game area reaching ball detection switch (not shown) for detecting that the shot game ball has reached the game area is provided near the terminal end of the shooting path 701. Based on the detection results of the three switches of the game area reaching ball detection switch, the passing situation of the launched game ball may be detected. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of monitoring whether the detection result of the foul prize winning switch 208a is due to the normal game or the illegal game.

Specifically, the game ball detected by the shot ball detection switch 208a passes either the foul winning switch 208a or the game area reaching ball detection switch after a predetermined time. Therefore, when the shooting ball detection switch 208a detects a game ball, it starts timing a predetermined time. is determined to be normal, and when both the foul winning switch 208a and the game area reaching ball detection switch detect the game ball at other timings, that is, within the predetermined time, and when the foul ball is detected outside the predetermined time When the winning switch 208 detects a game ball, the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process is started. By doing so, it is possible to determine the state in which the game ball detected by the shot ball detection switch 208a has reached the game area, that is, the fact that the game is being played illegally while the game is being played normally. Become.

When such control is used, it is preferable to provide a plurality of areas (capable of storing four balls) for storing the detection results of the ball detection switch 208b. This is because, after being detected by the shot ball detection switch 208b, a newly shot game ball hits the shot ball detection switch 208b until it passes through the foul prize winning switch 208a or the game area reaching ball detection switch. in order to pass.

As described above, by providing a switch for detecting the passage of the game ball at each position of the launch path and detecting the detection status of each switch, even without the function of counting the detection result of each switch, It is possible to achieve the same purpose and effect as the ball entry abnormality determination process described in the present embodiment. In addition, in the description of the control described above, the description of the same points as the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) of the present embodiment is omitted. ) or may be provided independently.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. When the process of S1004 is finished, next, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot effect is executed, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is executed (S1005). . In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has elapsed and whether or not a specified number of balls have won. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

In the jackpot control process (S1005), a command based on the jackpot state of the special symbol is set. For example, an opening command is set when a special symbol jackpot starts, and an ending command is set when a special symbol jackpot ends.

The jackpot-related command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a jackpot-related command, it transmits a corresponding display command to the display control device 114 . When the display command is received by the display control device 114, the corresponding big win-related effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

Further, when it is determined whether it is time to start a new round in the jackpot game, the specific winning opening 65a is opened. Incidentally, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round, a round number command indicating the number of rounds may be set and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the start timing of a new round, and can change the music and performance in accordance with the start of the new round.

Further, at the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203e and the counter 203f during time saving are set based on the type of the jackpot of the special symbol being executed. Specifically, when the jackpot game by the jackpot A (variable probability jackpot) is executed, the variable probability flag 203e is set to ON, and when the jackpot game by the jackpot B (time-saving jackpot) is executed, during the time saving A counter 203f is set to 100; As a result, the variable probability game state is provided based on the big win A, and the time saving game state is provided based on the big win B.例文帳に追加

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 17), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S616 or S617 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S407 or the process of S409 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S407 or the process of S409 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) ends, the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S406 or S408 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 17), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 19 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the initial startup processing (see FIG. 20) can be performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the setting process (S901), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 24, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag 223x is turned on, the power-off processing in S1416 (Fig. 25 ) is started during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 25), it executes power-off processing in S1416. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag 223x is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag 223x is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1416 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag 223x.

If the power-off processing flag 223x is off (S1302: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely cut off, or the power supply in S1416 was started after a momentary power failure occurred. It was started after the execution of the power-off process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). is. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), it will transfer to S1304 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1416 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S1416, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1416 is executed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S1416 is executed, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1416 has been completed after a power failure has occurred. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1310). Thereafter, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1311), interrupt permission is set (S1312), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309 and S1310, which are clearing processing of the working area of the RAM 223, are skipped, and the processing is shifted to S1311. After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1311), is set (S1312), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process of S1308 is reached from S1304 via the process of S1306, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1411. In the process of S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1402 to S1411 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1412, the variable display setting process of S1413, and the counter value updating process of S1413 and S1414 are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1413 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1403 to S1413 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1402 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1408 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1407 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1408), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S1410, command determination processing is executed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S1411). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After finishing the process of S1412, a variable display setting process is executed in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1412). Specifically, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1412 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1413). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1413 (S1413: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag 223x are turned on (S1415), and the power-off processing is executed (S1416). . After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag 223x is turned off (S1417), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S1413 (S1413: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1414), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1414: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1414: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1411). This command determination process (S1411) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Further, in this process, when a command for the number of reserved balls is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1501). When the variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1503), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 27) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1501: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 27) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), then it is determined whether or not an error command has been received from main controller 110 (S1507). Then, when an error command is received (S1507: Yes), error processing (setting of error command for display, etc.) according to the received command is executed (S1508), and this processing ends.

Here, as an error command in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of foul winnings is larger than the number of shot balls in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) executed by the main controller 110 and an error command (S1215) that is set when it is determined that the number of balls entering the foul winning opening 601 is large.

Specifically, in the process of S1508, when the error command set by the process of S1213 is received, the setting is made to output a voice saying "The number of fouls is greater than the number of shots", The number of fouls is greater than the number.” is set as a display error command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加Also, when the error command set by the processing of S1215 is received, it is set to output a voice saying "The number of fouls is large", and the characters "The number of fouls is large" are displayed in the third pattern. A display error command to be displayed on the device 81 is set. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the set sound may be an alarm sound (for example, "beep beep" sound), and the third symbol display device 81 may display a specific image instead of characters (for example, an image indicating the occurrence of an abnormality). ) may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified to surrounding players in a recognizable manner, but is not limited to this, and is notified in a manner recognizable only to hall employees (for example, A specific LED may emit light), or the occurrence of an abnormality may be notified only by the hall computer without using sound or screen display. As a result, fraud can be monitored without being detected by the player.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1402) of the main processing (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display error command, the third pattern display device 81 starts displaying an error corresponding to the command.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, if an error command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1509). ) and return to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is sent to the display control device 114. Set the command to send to Other commands include, for example, the above-mentioned opening command, reserved ball count command, and the like.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1412). This variable display setting process (S1412) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1601: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1606. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1603).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1604). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

After completing the process of S1604, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1606.

In the process of S1606, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1606). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S1606: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display setting process is terminated. Return to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1606: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1607), and then in the processing of S1506 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 26), The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1608).

Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1609). exit. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

As described above, in the first embodiment, regarding the handling of foul balls that occur when a player plays a game, the foul prize winning opening 601 is provided, and the game can be played again by paying out the prize balls. Since it is provided, there is no need to provide a dedicated path for returning foul balls as in the past. It is possible to increase the degree. In particular, when the foul prize winning port 601 is provided on the game board 13 and the payout control device 111, the upper tray 17, and the ball shooting unit 112a are provided on the inner frame 12 side, the components are moved from the game board 13 side to the inner frame 12 side. It is necessary to provide a path for returning the foul ball so as to straddle it, which is more effective in such a game machine.

In addition, the foul ball can be easily diverted from the launch path 701 by providing the foul winning opening 601 at a position in the launch path 701 that utilizes the flow of the foul ball's own weight.

Furthermore, since the branch path to the foul prize winning opening 601 is provided so as to avoid the area through which the game balls shot by the ball shooting unit 112a pass, the game is not hindered.

In addition, even if the foul prize winning port 601 is provided at a position closer to the ball shooting unit 112a than the prize winning port provided in the game area, the structure for preventing cheating by the game ball with string and the control for monitoring the cheating are provided. , it is possible to deal with fraud.

<First modification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 28 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The first modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed, the guide member is removed, and the paths of game balls that can enter the foul winning opening 601 are increased. They are identical in other respects. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the first modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul ball that flows down the second opening 604 flows into the foul winning opening 601 provided within the game area. It is configured to enter the ball. In addition, among the game balls that have reached the game area from the first opening 603 of the launch path 701, the game balls with extremely weak launch strength flow down the special flow path provided on the inner peripheral side of the inner rail 61 and enter the foul winning opening 601. It is possible to win a prize.

The flow of game balls in launch path 701 will be described. A game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 to reach the outer rail 62, and then is guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. In other words, in the first modification, the game ball that is fired passes along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, so the inner peripheral side of the launch path where the fired game ball cannot enter is provided with a second opening.

As described above, since the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls in the first modified example, the guide member 605 need not be provided.

A foul ball generated at the end of the launch path 701 flows down the launch path and is guided to the second opening 604 by the guide member 602 .

As described above, in the first modification, in the configuration in which the foul prize winning opening 601 into which a foul ball can enter is provided, the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a smoothly reaches the game area. No need to add new configuration. Also, even if the game ball reaches the game area, it is possible to handle the game ball that has been shot at a position unsuitable for the game due to its extremely weak launch strength, like a foul ball. In order to more reliably guide a foul ball generated above the second opening 604 to the second opening 604, it is preferable to provide the second opening 604 at the upper left chord position. By doing so, the weight of the foul ball works and the ball flows down to the second opening 604 more reliably.

<Second modification>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed, and FIG. The second modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the second modification, a second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and a foul ball flowing down through the second opening 604 flows into the foul winning opening 601 provided within the game area. It is configured to enter the ball. Further, a foul ball entry path 606 guides a foul ball to a foul ball winning opening 601 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 30). The game board 13 is made of highly transparent acrylic resin so that the player can see game balls flowing down the back side of the game board 13 .

The flow of game balls in launch path 701 will be described. A game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 to reach the outer rail 62, and then is guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. That is, in the second modification, since the game ball that is fired passes along the outer peripheral side of the firing path, the inner peripheral side of the firing path where the fired game ball cannot enter is provided with a second opening.

As described above, in the second modified example, since the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, the need for providing the guide member 605 is eliminated.

A foul ball generated at the end of the launch path 701 flows down the launch path and is guided to the second opening 604 by the guide member 602 . Next, the configuration in which the game ball guided by the guide member 602 flows down to the foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area will be described with reference to FIG.

30(a) is an enlarged view of the region XXIX in FIG. 29, FIG. 30(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXXa-XXXa in FIG. 30(a), and FIG. FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a); A foul ball generated at the terminal end of the launch area 701 flows down between the guide member 602 and the inner rail 61 and is guided onto the ball receiving member 606a. The ball receiving member 606a is inclined downward toward the right side in the front view of FIG. (See FIG. 30(c)). Therefore, the game ball on the ball receiving member 606a passes through the second opening 604 provided in the game board 13 along the formed downward slope (see FIG. 30(b)). A game ball that has passed through the second opening 604 rolls on a passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board 13, is discharged to the game area from a discharge port 600d provided in the game area of the game board 13, and wins a prize for a foul ball. It is led to mouth 601 . In addition, in the second modified example, the game board is molded from highly transparent acrylic resin, and the passage 606c is also molded from the same material. It is configured to be visible from the side.

By providing the structure for guiding the foul ball to the foul prize winning opening 601 on the back surface of the game board 13 instead of the front surface as in the second modification, the front space of the game board 13, that is, the range of the game area is limited. Since the number of games is expanded, it becomes easier to incorporate devices for improving the interest of the game.

In the second modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul prize winning opening 601 is provided in the game area of the game board 13, but it may be provided in another location. . For example, the second opening 604 may be provided on the outer peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul winning opening 601 may be provided on the lower right region of the game board 13 (see FIG. 32). By doing so, it is not necessary to provide the foul prize winning opening 601 for entering a foul ball into the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13 . Further, by lengthening the distance of the path 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent cheating aiming at the foul prize winning opening 601.例文帳に追加

In addition, the launch path 701 is configured with a depth that allows two game balls to pass in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a is located on the back side (game board 13 side). It may be configured so that it can be fired while maintaining a space that allows the ball to pass through. By doing so, when an opening is provided in the game board 13, the passage width direction of the launch path 701 can be narrowed, and the left-right direction (width direction) of the game board 13 can be effectively used. I can.

<Third modification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification will be described. FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The third modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the third modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul ball that flows down the second opening 604 passes between the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. The configuration is such that the ball passes through the second opening 604 formed therebetween and enters the foul winning opening 601 .

The flow of game balls in launch path 701 will be described. A game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 to reach the outer rail 62, and then is guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. That is, in the third modification, since the game ball that has been shot passes along the outer peripheral side of the shooting path, the shot game ball cannot enter the inner peripheral side of the shooting path. is provided with a second opening.

As described above, in the second modified example, since the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, the need for providing the guide member 605 is eliminated.

Further, the inner rail 61 is divided into a first inner rail 61a and a second inner rail 61b, and a gap large enough for one game ball to pass is formed between the lower end of the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. By providing it between the top end of the , the gap forms the second opening 604 , and the foul ball can enter the foul prize winning opening 601 without using the guide member 602 .

<Fourth modification>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The fourth modified example is a further modified example of the second modified example described above, and differs in that the position of the second opening 604 and the position of the foul prize winning opening 601 are changed, and that a guide member 605 is added, They are identical in other respects. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the fourth modification, the second opening 604 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul ball flowing down the second opening 604 is provided in the lower right area of the game board 13. It is configured to enter the ball into the mouth 601 . Further, a foul ball entry path 606 guides a foul ball to a foul ball winning opening 601 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 30). The game board 13 is made of highly transparent acrylic resin so that the player can see game balls flowing down the back side of the game board 13 . In addition, since the passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board is provided from the left end to the right end of the game board 13, the game ball path from the ball launching unit 112a to the foul winning opening 601 can be provided in the game area. It can be longer than the mouth (not shown), and it is possible to prevent cheating to the foul prize winning mouth 601 .

The flow of game balls in launch path 701 will be described. The game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 and reaches the guide member 605. After that, the game ball rolled along the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 to reach the game area. led to. In other words, in the fourth modified example, the shot game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the second opening 604 and reaches the game area. A foul ball generated on the terminal end side of the launch path 701 passes through the second opening provided at the lower left chord position of the launch path 701 due to its own weight.

By providing the structure for guiding the foul ball to the foul prize winning opening 601 on the back surface of the game board 13 instead of the front surface as in the fourth modification, the front space of the game board 13, that is, the range of the game area is limited. Since the number of games is expanded, it becomes easier to incorporate devices for improving the interest of the game.

Further, by doing so, it is not necessary to provide the foul prize winning opening 601 for entering a foul ball into the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13 . Further, by lengthening the distance of the path 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent cheating aiming at the foul prize winning opening 601.例文帳に追加

<Fifth Modification>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The fifth modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the position where the ball launching unit 903 is installed and the accompanying changes are made, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 described in the fifth modification, the game balls used in the game are recovered through a recovery path 901, and the recovered game balls are transported by a lift 902 to launch a ball provided on the upper left of the pachinko machine 10. It is a game machine of a system in which a game ball is lifted to a unit 903 and a game ball is shot to a game area by a shooting solenoid 904 .

In such a pachinko machine 10, there is no need to provide a shooting path 701 for causing game balls to reach the game area, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be utilized as a game area to the maximum. However, since the game ball is shot from the shooting solenoid provided on the upper left of the pachinko machine 10, there is no space for a member (shooting rail 801 in the first embodiment) for stabilizing the shot game ball. There is a risk that the shot game balls will vary. Therefore, a foul winning opening 601 is provided in a specific area where game balls unsuitable for playing in the game area flow down. By doing so, the player can play the game again without making a game ball shot to a specific area other than the predetermined position useless even though the player aims at the predetermined position. can be made

<Sixth modification>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. In the sixth modification, the foul ball winning opening 601 is used for the purpose of making the game play again as a result of a game with a game ball falling under its own weight in the game area (so-called replay function), in addition to the purpose of entering a foul ball. ), and is capable of providing new amusement. The sixth modified example is a further modified example of the first modified example described above. The difference is that the path to the ball is changed, but the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the sixth modification, a plurality (two) of second openings 604 are provided, and by quickly branching off the foul ball generated within the firing path 701 from the firing path 701, the foul ball is shot by the ball firing unit 112a. It prevents collision with the game ball. In addition, a buffer member 608 for preventing damage to the guide member 602 while preventing the game ball that has fallen from the game area from entering the shooting path 701 from the second opening 604 is attached to the second opening 604. is provided.

The flow of game balls in the characteristic launch path 701 of the sixth modification will be described. The game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 and reaches the guide member 605. After that, the game ball rolled along the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 to reach the game area. led to. In other words, in the fourth modified example, the shot game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the second opening 604 and reaches the game area. A foul ball generated on the terminal end side of the launch path 701 passes through the second opening provided at the lower left chord position of the launch path 701 due to its own weight.

Although a plurality of modified examples have been shown above, other configurations may be used without being limited to these. For example, the inner rail 61 or the outer rail 62 forming the launch path 701 may be integrally provided with a member forming the foul prize winning opening 601 , or the foul prize winning opening 601 may be provided in the launch path 701 .

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment and the first to sixth modifications, which are modifications of the first embodiment, a foul prize winning opening 601 is provided to allow a foul ball to enter, and the shot intensity does not reach the game area. It is configured such that the launched game ball is returned to the player as a prize ball based on the ball entering the foul prize winning opening 601.例文帳に追加

In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to be able to detect fraud such as illegal entry of balls into the foul prize winning port 601 based on the number of balls entering the foul prize winning port 601 and the number of game balls launched. ing. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the control processing of the first embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the firing intensity is adjusted so as to become a foul ball.

Specifically, in a game state (right-handed game state) premised on firing to the right side of the game area such as a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 causes the game ball to the right side of the game area. When the intensity is insufficient for shooting (in this control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the shooting intensity (in this control example, the operation amount corresponds to 20%) that the game ball to be shot becomes a foul ball. Adjust the firing intensity to

As a result, the game ball is not shot to the left side of the game area due to the player's operation error, etc., in spite of the right-handed game state, and the game ball is unnecessarily consumed and unintended winning. It is possible to suppress disadvantages to the player such as inviting

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the game machine in the second embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 35, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the content of a part of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the other points are the same. Specifically, the difference is that the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is newly provided with a launch permission flag 203r and a handle operation amount 203s. Other points are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The firing permission flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not to permit firing. When the firing permission flag 203r is ON, it indicates that firing is permitted. , indicates that the fire is not allowed. This firing permission flag 203r is turned on when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110. (S222 in FIG. 36). Then, when the shooting control process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 is referred to and the shooting permission flag 203r is ON, the game ball is shot from the ball shooting unit 112a. , and transmits a firing command to the payout control device 111 . When the payout control device 111 receives the shooting command, it transmits the shooting command to the shooting control device 112 based on the command, and the shooting control device 112 sends the ball shooting unit so as to shoot the game ball based on the received shooting command. 112a.

The operation amount storage area 203s is an area for storing the operation amount of the operation handle 51, and a value of 0 to 100 is stored. This value indicates the operating position (angle from the origin position) relative to the movable range (movable angle) of the operating handle 51 in percentage. For example, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 0, it indicates that the operation handle 51 is not operated (it is at the origin position), and when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 100, the operation handle 51 is fully opened (operable upper limit position).

When the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110, the operation amount storage area 203s The above-described launch permission flag 203r is set to ON (see S222 in FIG. 36), and the operation amount detection switch 51c is stored in the operation amount storage area 203s (see S223 in FIG. 36). Then, it is referenced in the firing control process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110, and the firing command is set based on the value of the manipulated variable storage area 203s (see S2005 in FIG. 37). ). Further, in this control example, when the game state is right-handed, and the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80, the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is assumed to be 20, and the firing command is set. As a result, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is insufficient to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area (in this control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the game ball to be shot is fouled. The firing intensity can be adjusted so as to form a sphere (in this control example, the operation amount is 20%).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing of main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the switch reading process and the firing control process are partially changed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the details of the switch reading process (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the switch reading process (S101). In the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the launch permission flag 203r and the value of the operation amount storage area 203s are set based on the states of the touch sensor 51a and the stop flag 51b. They are different and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the switch reading process, first, the processes from S201 to S206 are executed as in the first embodiment. Next, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 51a is on (S220). In the processing of S220, if it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is not turned on (S220: No), it means that the game ball is about to be shot without being based on the player's operation, and the game ball is shot illegally. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball is about to be shot, the process from S221 to SS223 is skipped so as not to permit the shooting of the game ball, and the process proceeds to S207.

On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is on (S220: Yes), it means that the game ball is about to be shot based on the player's operation, so the stop switch is pressed next. 51b is off (S221). In the process of S221, if it is determined that the stop switch 51b is ON (S221), it means that the player has turned on the stop switch 51b to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball. , the process of S222 and SS223 is skipped so as not to permit the shooting of the game ball, and the process proceeds to S207.

In the process of S221, when it is determined that the stop switch 51 is off (S221: No), the process proceeds to S222 in order to permit the shooting of the game ball. In the process of S222, the firing permission flag 203r is set to ON (S222), the value of the operation amount detection switch 51c is stored in the operation amount storage area 203s (S223), and the process proceeds to S207.

In the process of S207, as in the first embodiment described above, other switches are read and the process ends.

Next, details of the firing control process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the firing control process (S108). The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the shooting intensity of the game ball is adjusted when the game state is the right-handed game state, and the other parts are the same. is. As for the same parts, since there are parts where the details of the processing are specified in this control example, those parts will also be explained.

In the firing control process, first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag 203r is ON (S2001). As described above, the firing permission flag 203r is set to ON when the touch sensor 51a is ON and the stop switch 51b is OFF in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) ( See S222 in FIG. 36).

In the process of S2001, if it is determined that the launch permission flag 203r is off (S2001: No), the player has not operated the operation handle 51, or the game ball is about to be launched illegally. , and the game ball is not shot, so the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the launch permission flag 203r is ON (S2001: Yes), the process proceeds to S2002 in order to shoot the game ball. In the processing of S2002, it is determined whether or not it is in the right-handed game state (S2002). Specifically, in this control example, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), the probability variable flag 203e is set to ON to give the probability variable gaming state, and the jackpot B (16R short-time jackpot) After the end of the jackpot game based on, the time saving game state is given by setting the counter 203f to 100 during time saving. In this probability variation gaming state or time saving gaming state, the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area, so that the player becomes a right-handed gaming state where the game is played. Whether it is 1 or more determines whether or not it is a right-handed game state.

In the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the game is not in the right-handed game state (S2002: No), in order to execute normal firing control, the firing command is set based on the value of the operation amount storage area 203s, and the firing command of S2006 Go to processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, when it is determined that the game state is right-handed (S2002: Yes), the operation amount storage area 203s is stored in order to determine whether or not it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball. is in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003). Here, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is less than 30 (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is less than 30%), the shooting intensity is weak, and the shot game ball does not reach the game area. This is the case where the ball enters the foul prize winning opening 601 at the second time. Further, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 80 or more (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 80% or more), the shooting intensity is high, and the shot game ball is shot to the right side of the game area. is the case.

When the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80 (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 30% or more and less than 80%), although the shot game ball reaches the game area, This is the case when the ball is shot to the left side of the game area, but the right side of the game area is not reached (or is difficult to reach).

Therefore, in the process of S2003, if it is determined that the value of the manipulated variable storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003: Yes), the value of the manipulated variable storage area is set to 20, and the firing command is set ( S2004), the process proceeds to S2006. Thereby, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is the operation amount (30% to 80%) at which the shot game ball is shot to the left side of the game area, the operation amount is adjusted to 20%. The game ball is shot with a shooting intensity (that is, a shooting intensity that becomes a foul ball). Therefore, in the right-handed game state, game balls are unnecessarily shot to the left side of the game area, and unintended winning can be prevented. In addition, a game ball that has become a foul ball enters the foul winning hole 601 and is returned as a prize ball (one ball), so unnecessary game ball launch (shooting to the left side of the game area) ), game balls are not consumed unnecessarily.

In this control example, the shooting intensity is adjusted to 20%. However, the shooting intensity is not limited to this. . Also, since the intensity of the shot to the right side of the game area and the intensity of the shot to become a foul ball may differ depending on the configuration of the game board 13, for example, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 40 to 70 Alternatively, the emission intensity may be adjusted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2003, if it is determined that the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is not in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003: No), the launch strength is weak, and the launched game ball does not reach the game area and is fouled. When the ball enters the winning hole 601, or when the shooting intensity is high and the shot game ball is shot to the right side of the game area, the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is set to execute normal shooting control. , and the process proceeds to S2006.

After completing the process of S2004 or S2005, the launch permission flag 203r is set to OFF (S2006), and this process ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in the right-handed game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is insufficient to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area (in this control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the shooting intensity is adjusted so that the shot game ball becomes a foul ball (in this control example, the shooting intensity corresponding to the operation amount of 20%). As a result, the game ball is not shot to the left side of the game area due to the player's operation error, etc., in spite of the right-handed game state, and the game ball is unnecessarily consumed and unintended winning. It is possible to suppress disadvantages to the player such as inviting

In addition, a winning hole for one prize ball is provided in the game area, and in a game state in which the direction in which the game ball is shot is specified (for example, right-handed state), the game ball is shot in a direction other than the specified direction. While the shooting intensity is set, the shooting intensity may be forcibly changed so that one prize ball enters the winning hole by the shooting control process. As described above, while the firing intensity is being corrected by the firing control process, it is preferable to guide the player so that the operation of the operating handle 51 provides the correct firing intensity. By doing so, the player can quickly operate the operation handle 51 so as to obtain an appropriate firing intensity.

In this control example, the main controller 110 is configured to adjust the firing intensity, but the present invention is not limited to this. You can do it. As a result, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, in the case of the right-handed game state, it is configured to adjust the shooting intensity of the game ball, but it is not limited to this, and in the case of the left-handed game state, the shooting intensity of the game ball is adjusted. In this way, the game ball may be shot to the right side of the game area due to the player's operation error, etc., and the shooting intensity to be adjusted according to the game state may be changed (for example, when playing a left-handed game (Adjusted to be left-handed, and adjusted to be right-handed during right-handed games).

Furthermore, in this control example, the shooting intensity is adjusted according to the game state, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the shooting intensity may be adjusted according to the state of the ball shooting unit 112a. Specifically, the ball shooting unit 112a is not ready to shoot the ball (transient response of electrical elements, delay due to control processing, etc.), for example, even though the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 60% First, when a game ball can only be shot with a shooting intensity of 50%, the shooting intensity is adjusted to 20% to make it a foul ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from being fired into the game area with a launch strength unintended by the player, and disadvantages to the player, such as unnecessary consumption of game balls and unintended winnings, are suppressed. can do.

Further, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A) is awarded, the above-described firing intensity may be adjusted. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the privilege given by the big win, and to improve the interest of the player.

In each of the embodiments and modifications described above, output processing based on various determination processing is performed by the main controller 110, but all the output information is Also, even if the determination process is performed by a device other than the main controller 110, all information based on the determination result is output to the sound lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal board 261 It is configured to be possible. In addition, the output information can be identifiably notified to the outside. There is a connected display unit and the like.

It should be noted that the present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

All or part of the above embodiments and modifications may be combined. Further, although the sub-controllers such as the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are used, all the functions may be integrated into the main controller 110 .

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (foul ball prize)
It has a game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area, and a path capable of guiding the shot balls shot by the shooting means to the game area. a launch path; guiding means for guiding game balls that have flowed backward along the launch path without reaching the game area from the launch path to a specific area; and a game guided to the specific area. A specific ball entry means capable of entering a ball, and an imparting means for imparting a game value equivalent to at least one game ball each time one game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Characterized game machine A1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a shooting device for shooting game balls into a game area, and a game ball (so-called foul) that does not reach the game area among the game balls shot by the shooting means. Equipped with a ball recovery device that recovers the ball). A gaming machine is known in which the game balls recovered by this ball recovery device flow down a ball path provided in the gaming machine and are returned to the player again (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 9-308730). In this case, it is necessary to provide a separate ball path for returning foul balls to the player. There is a problem that the inside of the game machine becomes complicated in order to secure it. Moreover, there was a problem that the manufacturing cost increased.

According to the gaming machine A1, a game ball that has reversed the launch path without reaching the game area is entered into the specific ball entering means, and a game value equivalent to at least one ball is played based on the entering ball. Since it is possible to give a foul ball to a player, there is no need to separately provide a ball path for returning the foul ball to the player in the game machine, and the structure in the game machine can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need to secure a space for providing a dedicated ball path for returning a foul ball to the player in the game machine.

In the game machine A1, the guiding means has a guiding piece that can be changed between a first state that can guide the game ball to the specific area and a second state that restricts the guidance to the specific area, and the guiding piece is always arranged on the shooting path in the first state, and is changed to the second state by coming into contact with a game ball shot from the shooting means to the game area. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball fired from the launching means to the game area comes into contact with the guiding means, the guiding means is changed to the second state that restricts the guidance to the specific area, so that the game ball is released from the shooting means to the game area. To prevent a situation in which a shot game ball is guided to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the foul ball can be guided to the specific area without interfering with the normal game.

In the game machine A2, a specific opening communicating with the specific area is formed in the launch path, and the guide piece is arranged at a position that guides the game ball flowing backward to the specific opening in the second state. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the guidance means is in the second state in which the game balls shot from the shooting means to the game area are restricted from being guided to the specific area. also has the effect of guiding the foul ball to a specific area.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, storage means having a storage section capable of storing game balls to be supplied to the shooting means, and supply means capable of supplying game balls from the storage means to the shooting means. The game machine A4 is characterized in that the providing means pays out one or more game balls to the storage means as the game value.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it is possible to use a mechanism that pays out game balls based on the balls entering a prize-winning hole, which is conventionally provided in the game machine, and has the effect of simplifying the internal structure of the game machine. In addition, since the given game ball can be shot again by the shooting means without touching it, there is an effect that the player does not feel annoyed.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the giving means pays out one game ball each time one game ball enters the specific ball entering means. .

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, one game ball is paid out each time one game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that the player feels uncomfortable. There is an effect that it can be made not to give

Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 has a payout channel through which the game ball paid out from the giving means flows down, and the payout channel pays out based on the ball entering the specific ball entering means. It has at least a first flow path through which discharged game balls flow down, and a second flow path, different from the first flow path, for guiding the flowing down game balls to the storage means, wherein the first flow path is A gaming machine A6, characterized in that it is formed so as to guide a game ball to said shooting means without going through said storage means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A5, there is an effect that the game ball imparted by the specific ball entry means can be immediately shot.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, a game board having the game area and a frame configured to be detachable from the game board, the shooting means being arranged in the frame, A game machine A7, wherein the specific area is formed on the game board.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the foul ball generated on the game board side enters the specific ball entering means in the specific area provided on the game board, and the game ball given by the giving means is shot by the shooting means. Therefore, there is no need to provide a return path for foul balls straddling the game board and the frame as in the prior art, and there is an effect that the structure inside the game machine can be simplified.

In the gaming machine A7, the storage means, at least part of the provision means, the first flow path and the second flow path are arranged in the frame. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the path until the game ball imparted by the imparting means is shot by the launching means can be completed within the frame. Therefore, there is an effect that the structure inside the game machine can be simplified.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the shooting path is formed of wall portions erected in an arc shape facing each other with a width through which the game ball can pass, and the shooting means comprises the wall The game ball is shot to the game area along the outer peripheral side wall of the part, and the guiding means directs the game ball that flows backward along the inner peripheral side along the shooting path to the specific area. A game machine A9 characterized in that it induces to.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A9, there is an effect that the collision between the foul ball and the game ball shot by the shooting means can be avoided.

A game machine A10 characterized in that in the game machine A9, the wall portion on the inner peripheral side is formed shorter than the wall portion on the outer peripheral side.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, there is an effect that the foul ball can be efficiently guided to the specific area.

In the gaming machine A1, the shooting path is configured to have a depth that two game balls can pass in the front-rear direction, and the shooting means shoots the game balls to the game area. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that it shoots a game ball along a path through which one ball can pass on the depth side.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A8, there is an effect that the collision between the foul ball and the game ball shot by the shooting means can be avoided.

In the gaming machine A11, the shooting means can shoot a game ball with a shooting force that can reach the game area along a path through which one game ball can pass on the depth side. A gaming machine A12 characterized by:

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of the game machine A11, there is an effect that the game ball can be shot so that the foul ball and the game ball shot by the shooting means do not collide.

<Characteristic group B> (Detecting the passage of game balls and judging abnormalities)
A game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls toward the game area, and a shooting path having a path capable of guiding the shot balls shot by the shooting means to the game area. a first detection means capable of detecting the shooting ball; a second detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball, among the shooting balls, that has flowed backward along the shooting path before reaching the game area; determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is established based on the detection result of the means and the detection result of the second detecting means; and output means for outputting information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition by the determining means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player by causing a game ball shot by a shooting device to fall within a game area and entering a winning opening provided in the game area. is known (JP-A-2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, there has been a problem that an illegal game is played in which a player attempts to obtain a privilege in excess of the number of game balls shot by the shooting device.

The gaming machine B1 has the following effects. That is, it is possible to detect a shot ball and a foul ball, and output information based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor whether a fraudulent game has been played by the output information.

A game machine B2 characterized in that the predetermined condition in the game machine B1 is that the second detection means detects a game ball even though the first detection means does not detect the game ball. .

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor illegal games in which a foul ball is detected even though no game ball has been shot.

The game machine B1 or B2 includes a timer capable of measuring a predetermined time, and a timer starting means for starting the timer by the timer. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it determines that the predetermined condition has been established between.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make a judgment considering the time difference between the timing of detecting the game ball shot by the shooting means and the timing of detecting the game ball as a foul ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring fraudulent games.

In the gaming machine B3, the timing start means starts timing when the second detection means detects a game ball, and the predetermined condition is a predetermined time period measured by the timing means. (2) A game machine B4 characterized in that said second detection means detects a game ball.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, there is an effect that it is not necessary to perform constant clock time, and wasteful processing can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, among the game balls shot by the shooting means, the game balls that flow backward along the shooting path before reaching the game area are guided from the shooting path to a specific area. A gaming machine B5 comprising a guiding means, wherein the second detecting means is provided within the specific area.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, there is an effect that only foul balls can be reliably detected.

In the game machine B5, a branch opening for branching the game ball from the launch path to the specific area is provided, and the first detection means is provided immediately before the branch opening in the launch path. Machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the foul ball generated in the launch path passes through the branch and is guided to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball shot by the shooting means can be reliably detected without the first detecting means detecting the game ball flowing backward in the shooting path.

In the game machine B1 or B6, the second detection means detects the entry of the game ball that has flowed backward along the launch path before reaching the game area, among the launch balls, into a specific ball entry means. A gaming machine B7, characterized in that it comprises a giving means for giving a game value equivalent to at least one game ball each time a game ball is detected by the second detecting means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B6, there is an effect that the second detection means can be made common to the means for detecting the entry into the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic group C> (abnormality monitoring by counting foul balls)
A shooting path having a game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area, and a path capable of guiding the shot balls shot by the shooting means to the game area. a detecting means capable of detecting game balls that have flowed backward along the shooting path before reaching the game area, and counting means that counts the game balls that have flowed backward based on the detection result of the detecting means; and output means for outputting information based on the result of counting by the counting means within a predetermined period of time being the predetermined counting result.

Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player by causing a game ball shot by a shooting device to fall within a game area and entering a winning opening provided in the game area. is known (JP-A-2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, there has been a problem that an illegal game is played in which a player attempts to obtain a privilege in excess of the number of game balls shot by the shooting device.

The game machine C1 has the following effects. In other words, it is possible to count the number of foul balls and output information based on the fact that the counting result is a predetermined counting result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor whether a fraudulent game has been played by the output information.

In the game machine C1, when the counting result by the counting means becomes the first counting result predetermined as the predetermined counting result, the first counting result is obtained without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined period of time. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it outputs information based on what has happened.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the counting result becomes the first counting result, the information can be output immediately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to immediately grasp that a fraudulent game is being played.

In the game machine C1 or C2, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second counting result obtained by the counting means during the predetermined period of time is less than a first counting result predetermined as the predetermined counting result. The game machine C3 is characterized by outputting information based on the fact that the second counting result is obtained when the result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, there is an effect that both short-term fraudulent games and long-term fraudulent games can be monitored.

In any one of game machines C1 to C3, a ball detection means capable of detecting a ball fired by the shooting means, and a ball counting means for counting the balls based on the detection result of the ball detection means. wherein the output means outputs information based on the fact that the count result by the counting means within a predetermined period is greater than the count result by the shot ball counting means. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it becomes possible to compare the count result of the foul balls counted within a predetermined period with the count result of the game balls shot by the shooting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring fraudulent games.

The gaming machine C4 comprises correction number calculation means for calculating a correction number obtained by adding a predetermined number to the result counted by the number-of-balls-counting means, and the output means causes the count result obtained by the counting means within a predetermined period to be equal to the The game machine C5 is characterized by outputting information based on the fact that the number is greater than the correction number.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if a foul ball is generated at a timing that has passed through the launch ball detecting means but has not yet passed through the detecting means, correction is performed by adding a predetermined number as the allowable error range so that it is not judged to be abnormal. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring fraudulent games.

<Characteristic group D> (Structural measures for entry security)
A shooting path having a game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area, and a path capable of guiding the game balls shot by the shooting means to the game area. an opening into which a game ball that has flowed backward through the launch path without reaching the game area provided in the launch path can enter; giving means for giving a game value equivalent to the entering game ball to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the entering means; A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it has a protruding piece protruding from the bottom.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a game ball shot by a shooting device is dropped in a game area, and the game ball enters a winning hole provided in the game area, thereby giving a privilege to a player. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-252627). In such a game machine, in order to obtain a privilege greater than the number of game balls fired by the shooting device, a game ball with a filament attached thereto is manipulated to detect the entry of the ball multiple times. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine D1, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for illegal games to be played by the protruding piece with which the filamentous body attached to the game ball abuts.

In the game machine D1, the game machine D2 is characterized in that the projecting piece has a substantially opening width of the opening, and is arranged so as to project to a position facing the opening.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, there is an effect that the filamentous body can be reliably brought into contact.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the protruding piece is formed of an elastic material, and when receiving the backflowing game ball, receives the backflowing game ball and guides the game ball to the opening. , a game machine D3, which is elastically deformed in the direction opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball when an external force larger than that received from the game ball flowing backward is received in the direction opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the protruding piece with which the filament abuts is elastically deformed, so there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to play illegal games.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, cutting means having a predetermined cutting force is provided at least at the tip of the projecting piece.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, by enabling the cutting means to cut the filamentous body, there is an effect that illegal games can be prevented.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the guide passage is communicated with the opening and guides a game ball entering the ball-entering means from the opening to the ball-entering means. A gaming machine D5 is characterized in that a projecting portion projecting from the side of the opening is formed in the.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, there is an effect that it is possible to make illegal games more difficult by providing a plurality of parts with which the filamentous body abuts.

In the game machine D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that the ball entry means is arranged such that the projecting portion is positioned above a ball entry portion into which the game ball enters.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a part with which the filamentous body is brought into contact with certainty.

A gaming machine D7, wherein in the gaming machine D5 or D6, a specific cutting means having a cutting force is provided at one end of the projecting portion.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5 or D6, by enabling the filamentous body to be cut by the specific cutting means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent games.

In the game machine D3, the elastic body prevents the game ball from passing through the projecting path on the basis that an external force greater than that received by the game ball flowing backward is received in a direction opposite to the projecting direction of the game ball. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being elastically deformable up to a regulation position to be regulated.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the following effects are produced. That is, even if there is a player who is playing an illegal game while playing a normal game so as not to be discovered to be playing an illegal game, the projecting piece is elastically deformed so as to block the shooting path by operating the filamentous body. Therefore, the game ball shot by the shooting means does not normally reach the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to play the illegal game and the normal game at the same time.

<Feature group E> (monitoring the malfunction of the launcher)
A game area in which a game ball can flow down, a launching means capable of varying the launching intensity and capable of causing the game ball to reach the game area when fired at a predetermined launching intensity, and the launching means a shooting instruction means for instructing shooting with an arbitrary shooting intensity; a shooting path having a path capable of guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means to the game area; and the shooting means. specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball that has flowed backward along the launch path before reaching the game area, among the game balls launched by the above; is being performed, abnormal processing execution means for executing abnormal processing when a predetermined condition based on the ball entering the specific ball entering means is satisfied.

Here, there is a gaming machine that drops a game ball fired by a shooting device in a game area and gives a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering a winning hole provided in the game area. known (JP-A-2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, if there is a problem with the launching device, the player cannot shoot the gaming machine at a desired position, and there is a risk that the privilege will not be awarded.

According to the gaming machine E1, in spite of the fact that a launch instruction is issued with a launch intensity that reaches the game area, when the condition based on the entry of a foul ball into the specific ball entry means is established, Abnormal handling can be made executable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor the failure of the launching means.

The game machine E1 is characterized by comprising an operating means operable by a player, and a variable control means for varying the firing intensity instructed by the firing instruction means based on the amount of operation of the operating means. Gaming machine E2.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, there is an effect that the malfunction of the shooting means can be monitored even in the game machine provided with the operation means and the variable control means.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, counting means for counting game balls that have entered the specific ball entering means, and determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined number or more of entering balls have been counted by the counting means during a predetermined period. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the predetermined condition is established when the number of entered balls equal to or greater than the predetermined number is counted by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is conceivable that the game ball shot by the shooting means accidentally enters the specific ball entering means due to a factor other than the failure of the shooting means. However, if the firing means fails, that state will continue. Therefore, by executing abnormality processing when a predetermined number or more of incoming balls are counted, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring failure of the shooting means.

In the game machine E2 or E3, a determination means for determining whether the firing intensity instructed by the variable control means has been varied, and based on the determination by the determination means that the firing intensity has been varied, until a predetermined period elapses. A gaming machine E4 characterized by having regulation means for regulating the execution of the abnormal process during.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, immediately after the firing intensity is varied by a sudden operation, game balls with different velocities pass through the firing path, and there is a possibility that the fired game balls collide. That is, even if the launching means is normal, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the launching specific ball entering means. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the abnormality process until a predetermined period has elapsed after the firing intensity is changed, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring failure of the firing means can be enhanced.

The game machine E5 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the abnormality process executing means executes, as the abnormality process, a process of outputting an abnormality signal indicating an abnormality to the outside.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, there is an effect that it is possible to output an abnormality signal related to the malfunction of the shooting device to the outside.

The game machine E6 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the abnormality process executing means notifies a notification mode indicating an abnormality as the abnormality process.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E5, there is an effect that it is possible to notify the outside of the failure of the launch delivery.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, comprising a game value imparting means for imparting a game value equivalent to one game ball to the player based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. A gaming machine E7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the following effects can be achieved. In other words, game value can be imparted using the specific ball entry means used for detecting the malfunction of the launching device. Therefore, there is an effect that means for detecting game balls can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E7, the abnormality processing execution means executes the abnormality processing when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means when the operation amount of the operation means is equal to or greater than a predetermined operation amount. The game machine E8 is characterized by:

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E7, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor failure of the shooting means under specific conditions.

Any one of the game machines E5 to E8 is provided with determination means for determining that the player is in an advantageous state, and the abnormality processing execution means executes the abnormality processing based on the determination result of the determination means. The gaming machine E9 is characterized by having different contents.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E5 to E8, the contents of the abnormality processing can be changed according to the game state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to raise the priority of the abnormal signal during the jackpot.

In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determining means continuously determines that the number of entered balls equal to or greater than the predetermined number is counted. Gaming machine E10.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a problem occurs in the launching means, the state will continue unless the launching means is repaired, so that the discriminating means will continuously discriminate. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring malfunction of the launching means.

<Feature group F> (replay when game ball is shot to unintended position)
A game area in which game balls can flow down; a shooting means capable of shooting game balls toward the game area and capable of varying the shooting intensity depending on the amount of electric power supplied; and the first firing intensity when the amount of power supplied is less than the amount of power required for firing at the first firing intensity A shooting intensity correcting means for correcting the shooting intensity to a second shooting intensity or less that is weaker than the second shooting intensity, and a game ball can be entered by shooting a game ball at the second shooting intensity or less corrected by the shooting intensity correcting means. A game machine F1 characterized by comprising a specific ball entry means and an imparting means for imparting a game value equivalent to at least one ball each time one game ball enters the specific ball entry means. .

Here, there is known a game machine having a game feature in which, when a specific state (jackpot state) occurs, the firing intensity of the firing device is adjusted to aim at a predetermined location in the game area (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). publication). In such a gaming machine, if a game ball is shot at a location other than the predetermined location during the above-described specific state, the game ball is wasted. was dissatisfied with

According to the game machine F1, when the game ball cannot be shot with the shooting intensity instructed by the shooting instruction means, the shooting intensity is corrected to a weaker shooting intensity, and the game ball is shot with the corrected shooting intensity. Become. Since a game value equivalent to the shot game ball is given, wasteful consumption of the game ball is eliminated. Therefore, there is an effect that dissatisfaction of the player can be eliminated.

In the gaming machine F1, the specific ball entry means is provided in a guiding portion for guiding game balls that have flowed backward along the launch path without reaching the game area, among the balls launched by the launch means, The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second firing strength is weaker than a firing strength required for the shot ball to reach the game area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball shot with the corrected shooting intensity enters the specific ball entering means without reaching the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value equivalent to the shot useless balls can be given to the player without affecting the game in the game area.

In the gaming machine F1, the specific ball-entering means is provided in a specific area in which it is difficult for a game ball launched at the first launch intensity to enter the game area, and the second launch intensity is the The game machine F3 is characterized in that the shot ball is stronger than the shooting intensity required to reach the game area.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball shot with the corrected shooting intensity can enter the specific ball entry means provided in the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value equivalent to the useless ball fired using the ball entry means provided in the game area can be given to the player.

The game machine F2 comprises an abnormality determination means for determining an abnormality based on the ball entering the specific ball entry means, and the specific ball entry means while the launch intensity is corrected by the launch intensity correction means. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the entry of a ball into is excluded from the determination of the abnormality.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the accuracy of the abnormality determination means is improved because the result of intentionally entering a ball into a specific ball hole is excluded from the determination by the abnormality determination means. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machines F1 to F4, the shooting means includes an operating section capable of changing the shooting intensity to a first shooting intensity by pressing, and the predetermined operation is operating the operating section. A gaming machine F5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, it is possible to supply the required amount of power to the shooting means in response to the operation of the operation unit that changes the shooting intensity by a simple operation. There is an effect that it is possible to cope with a situation where it is not possible to make it in time.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F1 to F5, output means for outputting information based on the fact that the firing intensity correcting means corrects the firing intensity.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines F1 to F5, by outputting information based on the fact that the shot is being performed with the corrected intensity, for example, the player can grasp By displaying on the screen, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

A gaming machine F7, characterized in that, in the gaming machine F6, there is provided an informing means for informing a player in a recognizable manner based on the information output by the output means.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the player can recognize that the ball is being shot with the corrected strength, thereby preventing the player from being confused. has the effect of

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, specific ball entry information based on entry of a game ball into the specific ball entry means and entry of a game ball into entry means provided in the game area based on entry of a game ball A gaming machine F8 characterized by comprising external output means capable of outputting information and information to the outside.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, by outputting the ball entry information and the specific ball entry information respectively, the information receiver side can obtain the ball entry information obtained as a result of the game and the ball entry information obtained with the intention of returning the game ball to the player. can be managed separately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to accurately determine the situation of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls enter a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position within the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning (or passing through the winning opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
51 operation handle (projection means)
111 payout control device (granting means)
601 foul winning entrance (entering ball means)
602 guide member (protruding piece)
604 second opening (opening)
701 launch path

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a game ball shot by a shooting device is dropped in a game area, and the game ball enters a winning hole provided in the game area, thereby giving a privilege to a player. ing.

JP 2007-252627 A

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to obtain a privilege greater than the number of game balls fired by the shooting device, a game ball attached with a filamentous body is manipulated and the ball is detected multiple times. There was a problem that

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraudulent games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area, and a game ball shot by the shooting means. A launch path having a path that can be guided to the game area, and an opening into which a game ball that has flowed backward through the launch path without reaching the game area provided in the launch path can enter; A game value equivalent to the entered game ball is given to the player based on the entry means for allowing the game ball entered into the opening and the entry of the game ball into the entry means. and a protruding piece protruding from below the opening toward the firing path.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is an effect that it is possible to make illegal games difficult to be played by the protruding piece with which the filamentous body attached to the game ball abuts.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame and a lower tray unit removed; FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the pachinko machine in FIG. 2. FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a state in which the fraudulent game in FIG. 3 is being executed. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM in a main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a RAM in a main control device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value, and (b) is the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of the big win. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type when it is out (normal), and (d) is a variation type counter CS1 when it is out (probable variation) 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between , and fluctuation types. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM in an audio ramp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a RAM in the audio ramp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing switch reading processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing external output processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing ball entry abnormality determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing the start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower tray unit in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower tray unit in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 4th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 5th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 6th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment.

A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed, and FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the foul ball entry path 606, FIG. 4 is an explanatory view of the operation when a game ball with string enters the foul ball entry path 606, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 2) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails 801 and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 having a function of storing balls is projected forward from the front frame 14 and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17. - 特許庁The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). (not shown) and is guided to the supply ball launching unit 112a. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-reach effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball hole 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the themes given to each stage. It is The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. ”→“Island stage”→“City stage”→…. Also, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to the "town stage".

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. and an operation amount detection switch 51c formed by . When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (detection result of the operation amount detection switch 51c) changes corresponding to the operation amount. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor (detection result of the operation amount detection switch 51c) that changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51, thereby flying in response to the player's operation. A ball is driven to the front surface of the game board 13 by the amount. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is arranged at a rail mounting portion provided on the inner frame 12. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is erected like the outer rail 62 . The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

Firing region 701 will be described with reference to FIG. The firing area 701 is surrounded in the left-right direction by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (partly including the guide member 605), and in the front-rear direction by the front surface of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). This area is a substantially arcuate path formed on the left side of the game area with an inner rail 61 interposed therebetween.

The outer rail 62 is composed of an elongated stainless steel metal strip, and is attached to a resin (fluorine-containing polycarbonate with low frictional resistance) molded rail attachment portion disposed on the inner frame 12 . . In particular, the surface facing the inner rail with a predetermined gap is formed of a single metal strip, and when the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a passes through the shooting path, the metal strip is formed. It touches the seams so that the firing direction and firing strength are not affected.

Incidentally, the structure of the outer rail 62 may be erected on the game board 13 in the same manner as the inner rail 61 .

The shooting path 701 is provided to guide game balls shot from the ball shooting unit provided in the lower tray unit 15 of the inner frame 12 from above the game board 13 to the game area. A gap 802 is formed between the starting end of the launch path 701 and the terminal end of the launch rail 801. A game ball falling into the gap 802 flows down a foul ball passage 800b, which will be described later, to the upper tray 17. and returned. On the other hand, the end of the shooting path formed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 has a first opening 603 communicating with the game area, and the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a It passes through the opening 603 and reaches the game area.

The passage width of the launch path 701 has an interval that allows two game balls to pass through at the starting end, and is formed so as to gradually narrow toward the position where it passes through the guide member 605. At the passing position, the width of the passage is narrowed so that one game ball can pass therethrough. After passing through the guide member 605, the width is widened again to allow two game balls to pass through, and then gradually narrows again toward the terminal end. The reason why the width of the passage becomes narrow at the position where the guide member 605 passes will be described later.

A return ball prevention member 68 is attached in the vicinity of the first opening 603 . The return ball prevention member 68 prevents the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. In addition, the launch path 701 is provided with a second opening 604 that serves as an opening for a foul ball entry passage 606, which will be described later, and a launch ball detection switch 208b that detects game balls passing through the launch path 701. . A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Further, the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 are fixed by a resin circular arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is

The ball shooting unit 112 a is a unitized mechanism for shooting game balls supplied from the upper tray 17 toward a game area provided on the game board 13 . The ball shooting unit 122a is composed of members such as a shooting solenoid, a shooting rail 801, a ball feeding mechanism, and a positioning member, and is assembled to a base plate made by pressing a flat metal plate. The base plate assembled with each member is fixed to the inner frame 12 with screws.

If there is a slight error in the attachment position of each member constituting the ball shooting unit 112a and the attachment position of the ball shooting unit 112a to the inner frame for each pachinko machine 10, the shooting angle of the game ball to the game board 13 and the Since the firing strength is different, high-precision mounting is required. Therefore, the base plate is provided with fastening holes for attaching each member and bosses for fixing the position of each member, thereby enabling highly accurate attachment. Furthermore, a plurality of (six) screw holes are provided for attaching the base plate to the inner frame, so that the base plate can be attached to the inner frame with high accuracy.

The firing solenoid has a unit configuration in which a linear solenoid is housed in a case member. The firing solenoid is provided with a metal plunger arranged in parallel with the firing rail 801 in the longitudinal direction, and a resin cap covering the tip of the plunger. As the material of the cap, polyester-based thermoplastic elastomer is adopted in this embodiment. While the player rotates the operating handle 51, the firing solenoid is repeatedly energized and de-energized every predetermined time (0.6 seconds), and the plunger is repeatedly appeared and retracted accordingly. . When the plunger protrudes, the game ball positioned on the launch rail 801 by a positioning member, which will be described later, is launched obliquely upward toward the launch rail. A variable resistor interlocking with the operating handle 51 is connected to the firing solenoid, and the projecting speed of the plunger is adjusted based on the amount of operation of the operating handle 51. It is adjusted by the amount of rotation.

The shooting rail guides the game ball just after it is shot by the shooting solenoid, and is set at a predetermined shooting angle (20 degrees) so that the game ball is shot toward the shooting area 701 provided on the front surface of the game board 13. I had. The launch rail is formed to have an M-shaped cross section, and has a shape that suppresses variations in the game balls by allowing the game balls to pass through the central groove. Furthermore, in order to suppress variations in game balls and supply more stable game balls to the launch area 701, the length of the launch rail 801 is extended from the launch solenoid mounting position to the upper end of the area covered by the lower tray unit 15. It is set to 100 mm. A gap 802 , which will be described later, is provided between the end of the launch rail 801 and the launch area 701 .

The ball feeding mechanism feeds game balls continuously supplied from the upper tray 17 one by one to the starting end of the launch rail 801 . This ball feeding mechanism is attached to the base plate so as to cover the firing solenoid, and is equipped with a metal piece and an electromagnet for attracting the metal piece inside. moves upward, and when the electromagnet is de-excited, it moves downward due to its own weight. The mechanism is provided with a storage section capable of storing one game ball supplied from the upper tray 17 while the metal piece is moving upward. Then, when the electromagnet is de-excited and the metal piece moves downward due to its own weight, the above-mentioned housing portion communicates with the guide passage to the launch rail 801, and the game ball housed in the housing portion is directed toward the launch rail 801. flowing down.

The positioning member supports the game ball placed on the starting end of the launch rail 801, and can slightly change the launch position of the game ball. The positioning member is a cylindrical member attached to the base plate by an eccentric shaft, and the distance between the positioning member and the firing rail can be changed by rotating the cylindrical member about the eccentric shaft. It has a configuration that allows

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 designs) will be drawn. In the lottery for the special pattern performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special pattern is a jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that the special pattern is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot. is also determined. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ), and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot type of the special pattern, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as an added value after the jackpot is finished, a game in accordance with these jackpot types is provided. (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the lottery for the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, A special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed in the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and is also shown by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is performed and the variable display according to the lottery. is started. A special prize winning opening 65 a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first ball entry opening 64 . Therefore, during the special game state, since the player hits the ball to win the special winning hole 65a, many balls enter the first ball entering hole 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64 becomes maximum (4 times).

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67, a determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. become a state. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is changed to the first symbol display device 37. , and is also shown in the second symbol reserve lamp 84 . When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery. is started.

As described above, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols. When "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R jackpot). After that, in the "jackpot A", as an added value after the jackpot is finished, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a special pattern high probability state (special pattern definite variable state) from after the jackpot is finished until the next jackpot is generated. be. On the other hand, in the "jackpot B", as an added value after the jackpot ends, the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is set short during the period from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of the special pattern is completed 100 times. A time-saving state is given.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is up, the so-called special symbol high probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R It is a game state that easily shifts to a jackpot). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "time saving state of normal design" (during time saving of normal design) means that the winning probability of normal design is increased, the fluctuation time is shortened, and the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 It refers to a game state in which the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64, which is long and the number of openings is large. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal pattern", it is called "normal state of normal pattern", which means that the probability of hitting the normal pattern is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. .

Thereafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of high probability of special symbols after the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, the period from the end of the big win to the occurrence of the next big win is defined as the probability variable period of the special symbols. called. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal patterns after the special symbol jackpot ends, that is, the period after the jackpot ends until the special pattern lottery is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times) is It is usually called a short period of time in the design (simply called a short period of time). In addition, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, the number of lotteries of special symbols is used to indicate the time period of normal symbols. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 100 times, it is described that the time period of the normal symbol is 100 times.

The number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period of "normal pattern time saving state" according to the type of jackpot, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64, or once It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessary is released by hitting the normal pattern. In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, "special symbol high probability state" and "ordinary symbol time saving state", but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, "ordinary symbol time saving state" ” may be configured as follows.

Also, the duration of the time saving state may be determined arbitrarily. For example, when the jackpot type becomes "jackpot A", the normal pattern time saving state continues until the special pattern lottery ends 30 times after the "jackpot A" ends, and when it becomes "jackpot B", the "jackpot B" After the completion, the time-saving state of the normal symbols may be continued until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 60 times. Also, instead of the number of lotteries for special symbols, the time-saving state of normal symbols may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses.

When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by turning on the power, etc., it is always set to the "low probability state of special symbols". In addition, it is not limited to this, and may be set to the "special symbol high probability state".

In addition, when the special symbol hits and shifts from "normal symbol normal state" to "normal symbol time saving state", the state will be the time saving number of special symbol lotteries after the special symbol jackpot ends (100 times) continues until it ends. On the other hand, if a new special pattern does not become a big hit before the special pattern lottery for the number of times of time saving is completed after the special pattern is hit, the game returns to the "normal state of the normal pattern". As described above, the number of time saving times is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol, and if the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the predetermined number of times is 100 times.

Then, while the "normal pattern time saving state" continues, if a new special pattern hits, the "normal pattern time saving state" is further added after the new special pattern jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery of special symbols for the number of times corresponding to the jackpot type is completed. For example, after becoming a “jackpot B” and shifting to a “normal pattern time saving state”, when it becomes “jackpot B” in the 10th special pattern lottery, the “normal pattern time saving state” is further added to the “jackpot B”. ” continues until the lottery of special symbols is performed 100 times after the end. That is, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot occurs while the "ordinary symbol time saving state" continues, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is used for a short period of time (" The duration of the time saving state of normal symbols) is updated.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the variation of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. , the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the big win type (big win A, big win B) in the case of a big win. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described. The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which main symbols with even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. Further, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols added with odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" excluding "7" are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

The display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. It is a sub-display area Ds for displaying characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. and Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice effect is performed by putting out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

In the main controller 110, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), a special symbol lottery is performed using that as a trigger. pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. A variation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 varies the third symbol according to the variation display of the first symbol display device 37. display is performed.

When the variable display of the third pattern is performed in the third pattern display device 81, first, the high-speed variable display of the third pattern is started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). After the elapse of, the display is switched to medium-speed variation display of the third symbol, and further switched to low-speed variation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win, a stop display is performed in which main patterns (third patterns) of the same number are aligned, the variable performance is finished, and then the big win performance is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, a stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are not aligned, the variable effect is completed, and if there is a pending start winning, A lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and the next variable performance is started.

The jackpot performance is divided into three periods of opening performance, round performance, and ending performance. The opening performance is intended to heighten the player's expectation by notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and notifies the player of the game value (short time period of normal symbols) to be given to the player after the end of the big win (display of short time period). Or, it is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the reserved special symbol lottery (performing a fixed effect display). In addition, in the ending production, the game value (short period of normal symbols) is notified to the player is called "short period of time display", and the lottery result becomes a big hit in the lottery of the reserved special symbols. The fact that the player is notified of this is referred to as the execution of the “fixed effect display”.

When the big win effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. An opening command is sent to the device 113 . As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the opening effect is started following the variable effect.

Next, a round number command indicating the first round is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 at the timing when the opening effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, following the opening effect, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, that state is continued until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won). Together, the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round soon comes, and a round number command indicating the second round is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 . As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, following the round effect corresponding to the first round, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started. When the second round is started, opening/closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the first round. After that, every time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113, and the opening and closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. done. Thereby, each round production from the 1st round to the 16th round is executed in order.

Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 at the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is completed 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect. As described above, in the ending effect, the player is notified of the end of the special game state, and a short-time display is performed (the game value given to the player after the end of the jackpot (a short-time period of normal symbols) is displayed in the game. (The player is notified that the lottery result will be a big hit in the pending special symbol lottery). Whether the "short-time display" is performed in the ending effect or the "fixed effect display" is performed depends on the type of the special symbol this time, the type of the special symbol that is on hold, the value of the counter (not shown), etc. selected based on

When the third symbol display device 81 performs "time short display", for example, as shown in FIG. example of information) is displayed. This screen is displayed when a lottery for special symbols is made and the result of the lottery is "jackpot B", and the time-saving state of normal symbols is displayed until the lottery for special symbols is completed 100 times after the completion of the jackpot. means to continue. When this screen is displayed, the player can easily recognize the period in which the time saving state of normal symbols is continued (short time of normal symbols).

In addition, the longer the time period of the normal pattern, the more chances the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, so the chances of the lottery for the normal pattern increase, and the chance of winning the normal pattern also increases. become more. As a result, there are more opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a jackpot of normal symbols, so that the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 and the lottery for the special symbols can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, so that a normal pattern jackpot is generated and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the first ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

On the other hand, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the “fixed effect display”, for example, “super chance!” . This screen means that the result of the lottery will always be a big win when any one of the pending special symbol lotteries is drawn. When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the reserved special symbol lottery will result in a special symbol jackpot, so that the player can be expected to surely win a special symbol jackpot. can be held. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol that is performed when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state, As a stop symbol after the end of variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 is achieved. The number of times the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. be. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of balls that pass through the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It is visible through window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Next, the passage forming member 800 provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. The passage forming member 800 is composed of a unit base assembled to the inner frame 12 and a unit cover assembled to the lower tray unit 15. By closing the lower tray unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 12, the game balls are released. It is formed in a state in which the width of the passage through which one ball can pass is secured. With such a configuration, even if ball clogging occurs in the passage forming member 800, the inside of the passage can be easily inspected simply by opening the lower tray unit 15 from the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加When adopting a configuration in which a ball passage is formed by closing a plurality of members in this way, one member has a passage surface through which the game ball passes, and the other member has another surface that constitutes the passage. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the joints of each member when passing through the ball passage and the ball flow from becoming unstable. In this embodiment, since it is possible to easily inspect the inside of the ball passage even if it is a complicated ball passage, the unit base and the unit cover are each molded with a resin molded product (polycarbonate).

It should be noted that the passage forming member 800 does not have to have the configuration described above, and may be a part of the ball passage. Further, it is sufficient that the ball passage can be configured by assembling the unit base and the unit cover, and the unit cover may be attached to the unit base.

The passage forming member 800 includes a lower tray discharge passage 800a for discharging game balls to the lower tray 50 when the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 1) is full, and a A foul ball passage 800b for ejecting a game ball (hereinafter referred to as a foul ball) that has reached the target but entered the launch path 701 again after colliding with a nail or the like to the upper tray 17, and a ball removal switch (not shown). A shot ball discharge passage 800c is formed for discharging the game ball on the shooting rail 801 to the lower tray 50 at the time of the ball extracting operation by operating . The passage forming member 800 integrally forms the lower tray discharge passage 800a, the foul ball passage 800b, and the shot ball discharge passage 800c. The parts cost can be reduced by simplification, the assembly cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts, or the parts can be formed compactly to facilitate the layout of other parts. In addition, since a plurality of passages are collectively resin-molded, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the positional relationship of each passage.

In particular, since the confluence portion where the game balls flowing down the lower tray discharge passage 800a and the game balls flowing down the shot ball discharge passage 800c are also resin-molded in advance, the game balls flowing down the lower tray discharge passage 800a have priority. It is possible to reliably and easily realize a configuration in which the balls flow down to the lower tray discharge port 50a from above the shot ball discharge passage 800c.

A gap 802 of about 40 mm is formed between the launch rail 801 and the launch path 701 formed by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a foul ball dropped from this gap is received. is provided with a foul ball passage 800b. A foul ball received in the foul ball passage 800b is discharged to the upper tray 17 through the upper tray discharge port 17a.

At the right end of the passage forming member 800, a shot ball discharge passage 800c, which is a game ball passage that connects the downstream side of the shot rail 801 and the lower tray discharge port 50a, is formed. A shutter mechanism (not shown) that can be opened and closed is provided at the entrance of the shot ball discharge passage 800c, and the shutter mechanism is opened by operating a ball removal switch (not shown) provided on the upper tray 17. A game ball positioned on the adjacent launch rail is discharged to the launch ball discharge passage 800c and returned to the lower tray 50. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the foul ball passage 800b is guided to the upper tray 17, but instead of being guided to the upper tray 17, it may be guided directly to the ball shooting unit 112a. By doing so, even if a foul ball is generated, it can be quickly re-fired.

Next, of the shooting path 701 provided on the game board 13, the configuration near the foul ball entry passage 606 provided on the lower left side of the shooting path 701 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. A foul ball entry passage 606 is a passage through which a foul ball flows down, and is defined in the width direction by an outer rail 62, a guide member 605, and an entry passage forming member 607 erected on the game board 13. , the front and rear surfaces of which are defined by the glass unit 16. As shown in FIG. It is a space in which game balls branched from the launch path 701 by the second opening 604 flow down. A foul ball flowing down in the foul ball entry passage 606 enters a foul prize winning opening 601 provided in the passage. As described above, the glass unit 16 forms the front surface of the foul ball entry passage 606, so the inside of the passage can be visually confirmed. Further, by opening the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached, the inside of the passage can be easily inspected.

The second opening 604 is formed between the outer rail 62 and the guide member 605 that form the outer peripheral side of the arc-shaped firing path 701 . This second opening 604 is located on the outer peripheral side of the area where the ball is launched upward and to the left in the launch path 701 (hereinafter referred to as the lower left chord area), that is, when the foul ball flows down due to its own weight, the launch path 701 is opened. It is provided at a position (hereinafter referred to as the left lower chord position) that abuts on the outer peripheral side of the. The reason why the second opening 604 is provided at the lower left chord position is that a foul ball generated near the terminal end of the launch path 701 can enter the second opening 604 by its own weight. In addition, when the second opening 604 is provided near the end of the launch path 701, that is, in the area where the launched game ball moves upward to the right (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord area), the foul ball flows down due to its own weight. The position at which it abuts when it hits is the inner peripheral side (inner rail 61) of the launch path 701 (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord position). In this embodiment, the shooting path 701 has a left arc shape so that the game ball is shot toward the upper left. By providing the second opening 604 on the side that contacts with its own weight, it becomes possible to easily enter a foul ball.

Next, the configuration near the second opening 604 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of area II in the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. A guiding member 602 for guiding the foul ball to the second opening is provided on the second opening 604 on the side of the guiding member 605 (on the right side in FIG. 3). The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member (urethane), and its mounting base 602a is fixed to the game board 13 with screws. Since the mounting base portion 602a is covered with the protective portion 605b of the guide member 605, the game balls do not collide. The guide member 602 extends to approximately half the width of the launch path 701 to receive the foul ball, thereby preventing the foul ball from flowing down to the beginning of the launch path 701 . Also, the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a rolls on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 and then comes into contact with the guide member 602, but the tip of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 Since it is a protective part formed so as to cover the mounting base 602a of 602, the tip of the guiding member 602 comes into contact with the shot game ball. The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member, and when it comes into contact with a game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a, its tip elastically deforms in the direction of entering the foul ball entry passage 606 (dotted line in FIG. 3). (see the drawing), and the second opening 604 is partially covered. In this state, the guiding member 602 faces the second opening, and the opening width of the second opening 604 is narrowed.

Therefore, when the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a passes near the guide member 602, the guide member 602 is elastically deformed, so that the shooting power does not drop significantly. In addition, the elastic deformation of the guide member narrows the opening width of the second opening 604, so that the projectile can be smoothly shot without falling into the second opening. After the shot game ball has passed through, the guiding member 602 elastically returns to its original position.

Next, the case where the guide member 602 collides with the foul ball will be described. The leading end of the guide member 602 is configured to protrude toward the firing path 701 from a straight line connecting the inclined surface 605 a of the guiding member 605 and the starting end of the inclined surface of the outer rail 62 . Further, the outer rail 62 and the second opening 604 are formed such that the extension of the inclined surface of the outer rail 62 toward the second opening 604 faces the inside of the second opening 604 . At the location configured in this manner, a foul ball flowing down from the outer rail 62 side follows one of the following routes to enter the second opening 604 .

When entering the second opening 604 without contacting the guide member 602, the falling speed of the foul ball is reduced by the protruding part 605a to prevent the foul ball from reaching the foul winning opening 601 with its momentum, and then the foul ball is released. The player reaches the winning opening 601 . On the other hand, when entering the second opening after coming into contact with the guide member 602 , the guide member is elastically deformed in the direction of entering the firing path 701 due to the external force received from the foul ball. After the falling velocity of the foul ball is reduced by this elastic deformation, it reaches the foul winning opening 601 .

Even if the guide member 602 is elastically deformed in the direction of entering the firing path 701 due to the external force received from the foul ball, since the protective portion 605b of the guide member 605 limits the change of the guide member 602, The firing path 701 is not blocked by the external force received, and the guide member is extended only to the extent that the opening width of the second opening 604 is widened (to the extent that the gap between the guide member 602 and the protective portion 605b in FIG. 3 disappears). Only 602 is elastically deformed. Even in such an elastically deformed state, the passage width of the shooting path 701 immediately after passing the guide member 605 is such that two game balls can pass through the shooting path 701 so that the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a can pass through the shooting path 701. possible width.

By using such a configuration, it is possible to achieve both the function of receiving a foul ball and guiding it to the foul ball entry path 606 and the function of smoothly passing the game ball fired from the ball shooting unit 112a. becomes. Furthermore, since the guide member 605, which is a separate member from the guide member 602, is used to limit the elastic deformation of the guide member 602, the guide member 602 can be moved in one direction (into the foul ball entry passage 606). It is possible to eliminate the need to use complicated techniques such as making a material that is easy to change and hard to change in the other direction (the direction that blocks the launch path).

In addition, the guide member 602 is not limited to the above-described configuration, as long as it has the function of guiding the foul ball to the second opening without blocking the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a. Often, for example, the mounting base 602a has a spring structure that can rotate and return to the origin position, and a plate-like member is pivotally supported by the mounting base 602a. It can also be configured as follows.

In addition, even if it is a non-variable configuration, it is sufficient if it is a configuration that achieves the above functions. It is good also as a structure which prevents it from doing. In this embodiment, urethane is used as the elastic member, but other rubbers (silicon rubber, etc.) may be used as long as the material has excellent impact resilience. Further, the mounting position of the guide member 602 may be on the inner rail 61 side.

Inside the foul ball entry passage 606, a protrusion 605c formed integrally with the guide member 605 is provided so as to cover the foul prize winning port 601, although the details will be described later. Prevents violent collisions.

The foul ball that has flowed down the foul ball entry passage 606 enters the foul prize winning opening 601, and like the game balls that have entered the other prize winning openings, flows down the recovery passage (not shown), and then the game board 13. It is discharged to an out port (not shown) provided on the rear surface. The foul prize winning switch 208a detects a foul ball entering the foul prize winning port 601, and the result of the detection is used for prize ball payout processing (not shown) and ball abnormality determination processing (S1004 in FIG. 23), which will be described later. used for

The shot ball detection switch 208b is a proximity switch that detects a game ball that has passed through the shot path 701, and the detection result is used in the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004 in FIG. 23), which will be described later. The shot ball detection switch 208b is provided in the vicinity of the guide member 602, which is a position that allows the shot game ball to be detected and prevents the foul ball from flowing backward.

By using a switch that can also detect the direction in which the game ball passes as the shot ball detection switch 208b, it is determined whether the detected game ball is a game ball that has been shot or a foul ball that has flowed backward along the shooting path 701. Therefore, the mounting position of the shot ball detection switch 208b can be freely determined. As a switch capable of detecting the passing direction of game balls, it is provided with a passage through which the game balls pass in a row and a plurality of detecting portions provided along the passing direction of the game balls. ) is conceivable to detect the passing direction of a game ball. Specifically, it is conceivable to detect a change in magnetic field or an electric signal corresponding to a change in magnetic field.

In this embodiment, the foul ball entry path 606 is configured to form an acute angle with respect to the launch path 701 . This is a configuration for taking countermeasures against the flow of game balls in the launch path 701 and the foul prize winning opening 601, the details of which will be described later.

Here, the flow of game balls shot by the ball shooting unit 112a will be described. A game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112 a rolls on the shooting rail 801 , jumps over the gap 802 with its momentum, and rolls on the inclined surface 605 a of the guide member 605 . After that, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604, goes along the outer rail 62, passes through the first opening 603 provided with the return ball prevention member 68, and enters the game area. be launched.

Among the game balls shot by the ball shooting unit 112a, the flow of the foul balls differs depending on where the foul balls are generated. When a foul ball is generated on the terminal side of the launch path 701, it is guided into the foul ball entry passage 606 by the guiding member 602 and enters the foul prize winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entry passage. Although the details will be described later, the number of payouts (number of prize balls) based on the ball entering the foul prize winning port 601 is set to one ball, and payout control is performed based on the game ball entering the foul prize winning port 601. One game ball is put out to the upper tray 17 from the device 111 .

On the other hand, the foul ball generated on the starting end side of the launch path 701, more specifically, on the starting end side of the launch path 701 from the second opening 604 serving as the branch port to the foul ball entrance passage 606 falls into the gap 802. Then, it is returned to the upper tray 17 through the foul ball passage 800b.

In this embodiment, the foul ball is branched by the second opening 604 or the gap 802, and both are configured to supply the game ball to the upper tray 17, so the player can play the game based on the generation of the foul ball. Since the ball is supplied to the upper plate, it can be fired again as it is. In addition, since two configurations (the second opening 604 and the gap 802) for branching the foul ball are provided at different positions on the launch path 701, the foul ball can be launched from the launch path 701 on the side closer to the point where the foul ball was generated. By branching from , it is possible to shorten the period during which the foul ball stays in the launch path 701 compared to the case where there is only one configuration for branching the foul ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a vicious cycle in which a game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a collides with a foul ball staying in the shooting path 701 and a new foul ball is generated.

Furthermore, since the foul ball entry path 606 is used as a configuration for branching the foul ball from the launch path on the game board 13, it is dedicated to returning the foul ball from the game board 13 side toward the front frame 14 as in the past. There is no need to provide a passage for Therefore, on the front frame side, the limited space inside the game machine can be effectively used as a space for installing other members (for example, decorative members and frame buttons). In addition, since there is no need to provide a path dedicated to foul balls so as to communicate with the front frame 14 side on the game board 13 side, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 is increased, and the pachinko machine can improve the interest of the players. 10 can be provided.

Here, a characteristic configuration of each member provided near the firing path 701 will be described. The inclination angle of the shooting rail 801 is designed so that the game ball reaches above the lowest end of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 so that the game ball can surely jump over the gap 802 (approximately 20 degrees). The inclination angle of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 is designed to be steeper (approximately 30 degrees) than the inclination angle of the launch rail 801, and the gap 802 is positioned on the downstream extension line of the inclined surface 605a. Therefore, the foul ball flowing down on the guide member 605 falls into the gap 802 . Also, it is designed so that the shot ball rolling on the inclined surface 605 a of the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 . Specifically, an extension line A (see FIG. 4) extending in the shooting direction from the inclined surface 605a is configured to reach above the lower end of the outer rail 62. As shown in FIG.

Also, it is designed to face the second opening 604 on the extension line of the lower end of the outer rail 62 . Therefore, it is configured such that a foul ball that has flowed down along the outer rail 62 surely falls into the second opening 604 . In other words, the foul ball entry path 606 is at an acute angle with respect to the game ball launching direction (rolling direction) of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605, and the foul ball flowing down along the outer rail 62 flows downward. On the other hand, the foul ball entry passage 606 is bent with respect to the launch path 701 so that the foul ball entry passage 606 (second opening 604) is positioned on the extension thereof.

With such a configuration, the area through which the shot ball passes, the gap 802, and the second opening 604 can be provided at different positions, so that the shot ball does not fall and the foul ball does. can do. A similar effect can be obtained by providing a step in each passage.

Further, in this embodiment, the passage width of the launch path 701 is designed to be narrowed at the position where the protective portion 605b of the guide member 605 and the inner rail 61 face each other. This is to ensure that the foul ball generated at the firing path end side flows down to the foul ball entry passage 606 without flowing down to the firing path start side.

In this embodiment, the foul ball entry path 606 is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13 . This is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when dealing with a foul ball by paying out the prize ball instead of directly returning the foul ball as in the conventional art. In other words, since the game ball is paid out to the upper tray 17 by the entrance of the foul ball, the upper tray 17 (more specifically, the upper tray It is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13 above and near the point where the game balls are ejected.

As described above, by using the foul ball entry path 606 for processing foul balls within the launch path 701, there is no need to form a dedicated path for returning foul balls to the player. There is a risk that a player may illegally acquire a game ball by inserting a game ball attached to a string into a foul prize winning opening 601 provided in a foul ball entry passage 606 and manipulating the string. Therefore, a configuration for preventing the above fraud will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG.

FIG. 5(a) shows a state in which a game ball attached with a thread 610, which is a filamentous body, reaches the foul prize winning switch 208a in the foul ball entry passage 606, and FIG. 5(b) , a state after the string 610 is moved in the direction of an arrow 611 by pulling the string 610 by the player.

FIG. 5(a) shows a state in which a game ball attached with a string 610 is shot by the ball shooting unit 112a and reaches the foul winning switch 208a in the foul winning opening 601. FIG. A game ball attached with a thread 610 is thrown from the upper tray 17 in the same manner as a normal game ball, and is shot by the ball shooting unit 112a.

The string 610 used in such illegal games is thin enough not to get caught on the structure inside the ball shooting unit 112a, and is made of a material that can withstand the weight of the game ball. Specifically, piano wire, fishing line (made of nylon), cotton thread, and the like.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the foul ball entry path 606 is bent at an acute angle with respect to the game ball launching direction (rolling direction) of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605. When the game ball reaches the foul winning opening 601 (foul winning switch 208a), the thread 610 attached to the game ball is substantially V-shaped (or substantially U-shaped) (Fig. 5(a)). )reference).

In FIG. 5(a), the guide member 602 is in contact with the inner side of the substantially V-shaped thread 610, receives the load of the game ball from the thread 610, and its tip is on the side of the foul ball entry path 606. is bent into

The thread 610 is also in contact with the projection 605c of the guide member 605. As shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. The protruding portion 605a is configured to cover the foul prize winning port 601, and its tip portion (line B in FIG. 4) protrudes leftward from the end portion (line C in FIG. 4) of the foul prize winning port 601. (Line B is to the left of Line C). Therefore, part of the substantially V-shaped thread 610 comes into contact with the protrusion 605a. Line B in FIG. 4 is a vertical line that abuts on the tip position of the projection 605c, and line C in FIG. is a line.

FIG. 5(b) shows a state in which the player operates the string 610 from the state shown in FIG. 5(a), and the string 610 moves in the direction of the arrow 611 (opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball). In this state, the game ball to which the string 610 is attached is positioned above the foul winning switch 208a. In this way, by alternately repeating the states of FIG. 5(a) and FIG. 5(b), an act of illegally acquiring a game ball by detecting the winning switch multiple times using one game ball is performed. It will be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5(b), points different from FIG. 5(a) will be described. In addition to the change in the position of the game ball to which the string 610 is attached, the bending state of the guide member 602 is greatly different. This is because the guide member 602 yields to the frictional energy generated by the movement of the thread 610 and bends in the direction of movement of the thread 610 . This is because the string 610 moves in the direction opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball, so that the guide member 602 receives an external force stronger than the external force when it collides with the foul ball. It should be noted that the external force here is conceptually used as all the force that the guide member 602 receives and the force that a part of the guide member 602 receives. Among them, one point that is in contact with the thread 610 receives an external force, so that the tip of the guide member 602 is largely elastically deformed.

By elastically deforming the guide member 602 in accordance with the movement of the string 610 in this manner, the movement of the string 610 and the movement of the game ball are not interlocked, making illegal play difficult. By elastically deforming the string 610 so that the total length of the string 610 is shortened, it is possible to prevent the position of the game ball from moving even if the string 610 is pulled. Such a configuration may be a member that contracts due to the frictional energy generated by movement of the thread 610 .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the thread 610 moves, the tip of the guide member 602 bends so as to block the firing path 701. Therefore, a normal game can be played while the thread 610 is being used to cheat. Even so, the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a contacts the guide member 602 (or the string 610), and the shot game ball can be restricted from reaching the game area normally.

In addition, in this embodiment, the guide member 602 has the function of restricting the movement of the thread 610 and restricting the launch of the game ball when performing a normal game while operating the thread 610, but the guide member A new member may be used as an anti-fraud member apart from 602 .

A cutting means capable of cutting the thread 610 may be provided on the projecting portion 605c. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the thread 610 from being cut at the position where it abuts on the protrusion 605c, thereby preventing the above-described fraud. As the cutting means, it is conceivable to use frictional force and pressure when the thread 610 moves to perform the cutting. Moreover, a cutting means may be provided at a portion where the guide member is provided. By doing so, it is possible to provide the cutting means at the two locations where the thread 610 abuts, thereby making it possible to further prevent fraudulent games.

A detection switch may be provided on the projecting portion 605c so that the contact state for a predetermined time or longer can be detected. By doing so, it is also possible to monitor whether a game ball with string has entered the foul ball entry passage 606.例文帳に追加The position where such a detection switch is installed is not limited to this, and may be anywhere as long as the game ball does not come into contact with it for a long time and the string 610 comes into contact with it. In addition, a detection switch may be provided to detect that the guide member 602 is elastically deformed by the thread 610 and contacts the opposite wall (inner rail 61) of the firing path 701. A sensor for detecting the presence of the thread 610 may be provided at the portion facing the inner rail 61 . This sensor is provided with a plurality of detection units along the launch path 701, and it is sufficient if it can determine that the plurality of sensors continuously detect an object for a predetermined period or longer. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to the passage of game balls or dust adhering to the detection unit.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. The balls paid out by the payout device 133 are paid out to the upper tray 17 through the upper tray discharge port 17a by a downward ball flow path (not shown). A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 . In addition, the destination of the ball flow-down path along which the balls paid out by the payout device 133 flow down is not only the upper tray 17, but also a ball supply passage (not shown) that supplies game balls to the ball launching unit 112a, a ball It may be made to flow down to the discharge unit 112a, or a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of such paths are provided and the flow path is switched by a flow path switching mechanism. In this case, the channel switching mechanism may be operated so that only the winning balls based on the game balls that enter the foul ball winning opening 601 described above flow down to the ball supply passage or the ball shooting unit 112a. By doing so, it is possible to quickly play a game using the game ball provided by the generation of the foul ball.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment has been described above. A foul ball enters a foul winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entering passage 606. - 特許庁Then, one game ball is paid out from the payout control device 111 based on the ball entering the foul ball winning opening 601 and is given to the upper tray 17 . By using such a configuration, there is no need to provide a dedicated path for returning game balls to the upper tray 17 in response to foul balls, and the cost of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, as in the present pachinko machine 10, by using the prize ball payout mechanism based on the ball entering the winning hole, which the pachinko machine 10 has conventionally had, it is possible to achieve a greater effect.

In this embodiment, when one foul ball is detected, one prize ball is paid out. For example, in the case of a game machine that digitally manages balls in hand, a signal equivalent to one game ball may be sent to the digital. In addition, the number of game balls used and the game value of one variation of the special symbol 1 are associated in advance, the number of detected foul balls is counted, and when a predetermined number is reached, the game ball is counted. The special symbol 1 may be changed as a game value equivalent to the number.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the guide member 602 that guides the foul ball to the foul ball entry path is provided so as to be elastically deformed in the direction in which the opening width of the second opening 604 widens when it comes into contact with the foul ball. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently guide the foul ball to the foul ball entrance path. In addition, when the foul ball is not in contact with the guide member 602, the opening width of the second opening 604 is narrower than when the foul ball is in contact with the guide member 602. Therefore, the game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a It is possible to make it difficult to enter the second opening 604 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the game machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, between the payout control device 111 and the main control device 110 is configured to be able to transmit and receive in both directions by a data transmission and reception circuit, but for sub control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 to the sub-controller in one direction only.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 21). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 21).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol reserved ball in the RAM 203 is updated. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 When the value of the random number for the big win set by the symbol big win random number table matches, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for when the probability of special symbols is low (the period when the probability of special symbols is low) The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table for special symbols with a high probability and the first winning random number table for special symbols with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (not shown). See FIG. 6(a)).

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol is reserved in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 9(a), in the first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the number of random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot is one, and the random number is "0". is stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, there are 10 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot when the special symbol has a high probability, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/40".

It should be noted that the random value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability are duplicate values. You may set a random value for each jackpot so that it does not become. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), by changing the random number value to be a big win, a special symbol big win is achieved. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that becomes , fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 9(b), the jackpot type is "jackpot A" when the random number is "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2. Also, when the random number is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. In addition, from the value (random number) of the first per type counter C2, the random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type is set by the first per type selection table 202b, and this table is the main control device It is provided in the ROM 202 of 110 .

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Stored in area 203a.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used by the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 10) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. there is

In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", various types of "loss super reach", "loss special reach ”Various types are defined, and as fluctuation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of “shared normal reach”, “shared super reach”, and “shared special reach” are specified. Various types of common normal reach, various types of common super reach, and various types of common special reach are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the lottery result and the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is held and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number set as the hit, it is determined as the hit of the normal design. In addition, this second hit random number table 202c is for normal design low probability (normal state period of normal design), and for high probability that normal design hit is higher than the low probability time (normal design It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state, and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 9(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability of the normal pattern, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83. is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessary attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. , the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "o" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, and further, the first ball entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 . A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 21).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 serves as a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. , various flags and counters, and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 21) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Details of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will now be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. . Details of these various tables will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG.

FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a variable probability flag 203e. , time-saving medium counter 203f, special figure fluctuation start flag 203g, entrance flag 203h, launch flag 203i, entrance ball number counter 203j, launch ball number counter 203k, timer counter 203m, timer counting flag 203n and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), each of which has a first per random number counter C1. , the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area (moved), determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In addition, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, From the obtained values of each of the counters C1 to C3, it is also possible to predict (estimate) various information obtained when the original lottery is conducted. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. are added (see S504 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S305 in FIG. 14).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S306 in FIG. 14 and S505 in FIG. 16). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the holding ball of the variable display held by the main controller 110 You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls for display command, and displays the second pattern reserved lamp indicating the number of reserved balls. 84 is turned on.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203d counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the second entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. (See S704 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 17).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of variation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second random number The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right second ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S703 in FIG. 18: No).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the variable probability flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability flag 203e has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the end of the jackpot A (variable probability jackpot) in the jackpot control process (see S1005 in FIG. 21). After that, it is set to OFF when the start of the next big win is set (S313 in FIG. 14).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the value is ON, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e is selected. is OFF, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 15).

The time-saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203f during time saving is set to zero, and 100 is set at the end of the jackpot B (time saving jackpot) in the jackpot control process (see S1005 in FIG. 21). That is, when the jackpot B is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203f.

When the lottery for the normal design is performed, the value of the time saving counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the normal design is based on the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. While the lottery is performed, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, the lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 17).

The special figure fluctuation start flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to start the special symbol fluctuation, and if the special figure fluctuation start flag 203g is on, it means that it is the timing to start the special symbol fluctuation. , and if the special figure fluctuation start flag 203g is off, it indicates that it is not the timing to start the fluctuation of the special symbol. This special figure variation start flag 203g is set to on while a variation pattern command is set in the special symbol variation start process (see S412 in FIG. 15). Then, when it is referred to in the external output process (S1001 in FIG. 21), and when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 203g is ON in the process, that is, when it is determined to be the variation start timing of the special symbol (S1101 in FIG. 22: Yes), a variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1103 in FIG. 22), and is set to OFF (see S1102 in FIG. 22).

The ball entry flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the foul prize winning port 601. If the ball entry flag 203h is on, the game ball has entered the foul prize winning port 601 and a foul prize has been won. It indicates that the game ball has been detected by the switch 208a, and if the entering ball flag 203h is off, it indicates that the game ball has not entered the foul prize winning opening 601. This ball entry flag 203h is set to ON when it is determined that the foul prize winning switch 208a is ON in the switch reading process executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (S202 in FIG. 13). . Then, it is referred to in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of main controller 110 (see S1206 in FIG. 23), and when it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1206 in FIG. 23: Yes ), the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1207 in FIG. 23), and set to OFF (S1208 in FIG. 23).

That is, the ball entry flag 203h is set to ON based on the game ball entering the foul winning hole 601, and the main processing of the main controller 110 is based on whether or not the ball entry flag 203h is ON. Thus, it becomes possible to execute processing when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 .

The shooting flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has been shot. If the shooting flag 203i is on, it indicates that the game ball has been shot and the game ball has been detected by the shooting ball detection switch 208b. If the shooting flag 203i is off, it indicates that the game ball has not been shot. This shooting flag 203i is set to ON when it is determined that the ball launch detection switch 208b is ON in the switch reading process executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (see S206 in FIG. 13). . Then, it is referred to in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S1209 in FIG. 23), and when it is determined that the firing flag 203i is ON (S1209 in FIG. 23: Yes), The shot ball number counter 203k is incremented by 1 and turned off (S1211 in FIG. 23).

That is, the shooting flag 203i is set to ON based on the game ball being shot, and in the main processing of the main controller 110, the game ball is shot based on whether the shooting flag 203i is ON. It is possible to execute the processing in the case of

The number-of-entered-balls counter 203j counts a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds), it is a counter used to count the number of game balls entering the foul winning hole 601 . This ball entry counter 203j is incremented by 1 when the ball entry flag 203h is ON in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 23). S1207 reference). Then, after the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) has elapsed (S1216: Yes in FIG. 23), or after it is determined to be abnormal and error processing is executed (after execution of S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23), It is reset to 0 (see S1217 in FIG. 23).

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the number of entering balls counter 203j is greater than a predetermined value Y (10 in this embodiment) during the abnormal entering ball determination period (20 seconds) (Fig. 23 S1214: Yes), error processing is executed (see S1215 in FIG. 23). Here, the predetermined value Y (10) is set to a value that does not enter the foul prize winning opening 601 within a predetermined time (20 seconds) if the player intends to play the game normally. there is Therefore, if the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter exceeds the predetermined value Y (10) within a predetermined time (20 seconds) after the game ball enters the foul winning hole 601, the player can normally play the game. It is considered that an illegal act such as illegally entering a foul winning hole 601 is being executed. Therefore, in this case, error processing is executed as described above, and it is configured to be able to notify that an illegal act is being executed.

The shot ball counter 203k counts a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds), among the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a, among the game balls that have passed the shooting ball detection switch 208b, that is, among the game balls shot by the ball shooting unit 112a, a gap 802 is formed due to a shooting failure or the like. It is a counter used to count game balls other than game balls that have fallen to the ground (hereafter referred to as normally fired game balls). This shot number counter 203k is incremented by 1 when the above-described shot flag 203i is ON in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of main controller 110 (S1210 in FIG. 23). ). Then, after the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) has elapsed (S1216: Yes in FIG. 23), or after it is determined to be abnormal and error processing is executed (after execution of S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23), 0 (see S1217 in FIG. 23).

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), the number of ball entry counters is greater than the value obtained by adding a predetermined value X (2 in this embodiment) to the value of the number counter 203k of ball entry. When the value of 203j is large, that is, as a result of comparing the number of game balls that have been launched normally and the number of game balls that have entered the foul prize winning port 601, the number of game balls that have entered the foul prize winning port 601 is 2. If it is determined that there are more than balls (more than three balls) (S1212 in FIG. 23: Yes), error processing is executed (S1213 in FIG. 23).

In this ball entry abnormality determination processing, it is detected that the number of winning balls into a specific winning hole is larger than the number of shot balls, which cannot occur in a normal game, and the specific winning hole (foul winning hole 601) is detected. It is possible to monitor that a fraudulent act such as illegally entering a game ball into a ball is being performed.

Here, the reason why the predetermined value X is provided in the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the foul winning hole 601, the ball entry abnormality determination is started, and the shot ball number counter 203k and the ball entry counter 203j are counted. For this reason, the game ball that triggers the start of the entering ball abnormality determination is not counted by the shot ball number counter 203k. Also, at the timing when the ball entry abnormality determination is started, the game ball that has already been shot by the ball shooting unit 112a remains in the shooting passage 701, and the possibility that the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 is considered. be done. In consideration of such an expected error, a predetermined value X is set so that error processing is executed when an obvious abnormal state is detected. As a result, in the above-described case where the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than the value of the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k even though no fraudulent act has been executed, error processing is not executed. Unnecessary error notification can be suppressed. Note that the predetermined value X is not limited to the value described above, and may be a value smaller than 2 (eg 1) or a value larger than 2 (eg 5). Also, the predetermined value X may not be set.

Here, in the ball entry abnormality determination process, the entry ball number counter 203j and the shot ball number counter 203k are added because the ball entry flag 203h is turned on based on the game ball entering the foul winning hole 601. This is the case when the timer counting flag 203n is turned on. As a result, it is possible to execute the counting process by the entering ball number counter 203j and the firing number counter 203k necessary for the abnormality determination only during the entrance abnormality determination period (20 seconds), so that the game can be played outside the entrance abnormality determination period. machine processing load can be reduced. It should be noted that the number of shots counter 203k may be configured such that the count process is always performed, and the number of balls counted during the period during which the ball entry abnormality determination is performed is taken out.

Further, in the present embodiment, the incoming ball number counter 203j and the fired ball number counter 203k are configured to be added in the processing executed in the main processing of the main controller 110, but this is not the only option. It may be configured to add in other processing such as processing executed in interrupt processing of the device 110 .

The timer counter 203m counts a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds). The predetermined time is not limited to 20 seconds, and may be set to 10 seconds, which is shorter than this, or 30 seconds, which is longer, and can be changed by changing the value set in the timer counter 203m. there is

The timer counter 203m is set to 5000 (in 20 seconds) when the timer counting flag 203n is off and the ball entering flag 203h is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110. equivalent) is set (S1204 in FIG. 23). Then, when the timer counting flag 203m is ON, 1 is decremented each time the ball entry abnormality determination process is executed (S1202 in FIG. 23), and when the timer counter 203m becomes 0 (FIG. 23 S1216: Yes), the process after the predetermined time has elapsed is executed (see S1217 to S1218 in FIG. 23). Here, since the ball entry abnormality determination process is a process executed every 4 ms in the main process of the main controller 110, the timer counter 203m is decremented by 1 every 4 ms. That is, when 5000 is set in the timer counter 203m, it becomes 0 after 20 seconds, and processing is executed after a predetermined time (20 seconds) has elapsed (see S1217 to S1218 in FIG. 23).

In addition, the timer counter 203m is determined to be abnormal during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), and when error processing is executed (when S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is executed), a predetermined time ( 20 seconds), it is reset to 0 after the execution of the error processing because the ball entry abnormality determination is terminated.

The timer counting flag 203n is set during the period during which ball entry abnormality determination is performed in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (a predetermined time after the game ball enters the above-described foul winning opening 601). ). The timer counting flag 203n is set to the above-described timer counting flag 203n when the timer counting flag 203n is off and the ball entering flag 203h is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110. The counter 203m is set and turned on (see S1205 in FIG. 23). Then, it is referred to every time the ball entry abnormality determination process is executed (S1201 in FIG. 23), and is set to OFF when the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) elapses and the timer counter 203m becomes 0. (S1218 in FIG. 23). Further, when it is determined that there is an abnormality during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) and error processing is executed (when S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is executed), the predetermined time (20 seconds) has elapsed. , the timer counter 203m is turned off after error processing is executed (S1218 in FIG. 23).

The other memory area 203z is for setting (storing) other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Next, details of the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. .

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(a)) is, as described above, a table in which values of random numbers that are special symbol jackpots are defined. When the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, the first random number table 202a includes a table (first random number table 202a for low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit when the probability of the special symbol is low, and a high probability of the special symbol. A table (first winning random number table 202a for high probability) is provided for determining whether or not a special pattern is a jackpot at the time of probability, and the number of random numbers to be a jackpot included in each table is different. there is In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9B) is set so that the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be selected. Specifically, as the judgment value of the big win A, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to "0 to 49", and as the judgment value of the big win B is set to "50 to 99".

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 9(c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is "5 to 28". In the case of the range of , it is determined that the normal design hits. In addition, when the probability of the normal design is high (during the time saving state of the normal design), when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number buffer counter is in the range of "5 to 204", the normal design judged to be hit. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory is opened only for a predetermined time.

Next, details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10(a)) is a data table used for determining the display form of the fluctuation pattern, and the display form is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10(a), a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10(b)), a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(c)), At least a deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10(d)) is defined. Although not shown, in addition to this, a variation pattern table in the time saving game state and a variation pattern table according to the values stored in the special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a are set.

Next, the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 10(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big hit. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 10(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for failure. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 10(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and an external output terminal plate 261 are connected. Sends various commands and control signals to

The input/output port 205 includes the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111, a foul winning switch 208a, a shot ball detection switch 208b, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group 208c (not shown), and a power supply device. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to the touch sensor 51a provided in the operation handle 51 via the input/output port 215 and the firing control device 112, the stop switch 51, and the operation amount detection switch. 51c, signals output from various switches 208, and RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the firing controller 112, the external output terminal plate 261, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

As described above, the external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111, and receives signals from the respective input/output ports. The signals to be received include, for example, an abnormality signal indicating an abnormality in the main controller 110, an error signal indicating a state determined as an error by the processing performed in the main controller 110, and detection of winning in the main controller 110. and a prize ball payout signal indicating that the payout control device 111 has paid out the prize balls.

In this embodiment, the winning detection signal and prize ball payout signal based on the detection result of the foul winning switch 208b provided in the foul ball winning opening 601, which is the winning opening into which the foul ball enters, are applied to various winning openings provided in other winning openings. It is configured to be output separately from the prize winning detection signal and prize ball payout signal based on the detection result of the switch. This is because when analyzing the game results of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the hall computer, the ratio between the total number of game balls used (out total number) and the total number of game balls paid out (safe total number) is generally calculated. This is because calculation (base calculation) is performed, but if the number of prize balls paid out based on foul balls that have not been used in the game is added, it becomes impossible to calculate an accurate base value. Therefore, the hall computer has a different output mode so that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on foul balls can be eliminated.

These signals are transmitted from each control device (110, 111) to corresponding ports among a plurality of ports provided for receiving signals provided on the external output terminal board 261. FIG. Signals received at each port are referenced by hall computer 262 . In this embodiment, a plurality of ports corresponding to various signals are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and identifiers may be added to various signals and transmitted/received through one port. It is possible to identify which information the received signal indicates by the identifier. As a result, the number of ports provided on the external output terminal plate 261 can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

When the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot a ball, the shooting control device 112 shoots the ball with a launch strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 detected by the operation amount detection switch 51c. It controls the unit 112a. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls display such as audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting and extinguishing output from the lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable effects (variable display). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the device 114, and the like. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222. FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a.

In the fluctuation pattern table 222a, fluctuation patterns corresponding to the types of fluctuation patterns (off, reach out, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol pending ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a power interruption processing flag 223x, and a power interruption flag. 223y and another memory area 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It's becoming

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 203c, its value can be updated.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and lighting of the LED indicating the reserved ball number (not shown). That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, performs lighting control of the LED, and after storing In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 Drawing of the image is controlled so that the pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 26), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (see S1602 in FIG. 27). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S1402) of the main processing (see FIG. 25), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 26), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S1607 in FIG. 27).

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, power cutoff processing flag 223x sends a power cutoff command to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is set. It is set to ON, and power-off processing is executed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). Then, when the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag 223x is set to off (see S1417 in FIG. 25). This power-off processing in-progress flag 223x is referred to in the start-up processing (see S1302 in FIG. 24), and if it is on, the power has been turned off during execution of the power-off processing (that is, the RAM has been destroyed). Then, without checking for RAM destruction, the processing in the case of RAM destruction is executed.

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, a power cutoff command is sent to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is turned on. The setting is made, and power-off processing is executed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). Then, in the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 24), if the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared, and the power-off flag 223y is set off (S1310 in FIG. 24). reference).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 26) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) is controlled. Since this display control device 114 is a well-known device, its detailed description is omitted.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 12 to 23. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches (foul winning switch 208a, shot ball detection switch 208b, etc.) connected to the main controller 110, and executes processing according to the states of the switches. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the passage of the ball through the second entrance (through gate) 67 is controlled. Through gate passage processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, the switch reading process (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing this switch reading process (S101). This switch reading process (S101) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), reads the states of various switches connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control unit 110, and changes the states of the various switches. This is the process for executing the process according to the request.

In this switch reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the foul winning switch 208a is on (S201). The foul prize winning switch 208a is turned on when a game ball enters the foul prize winning port 601 and passes through the foul prize winning switch 208a. In the processing of S201, if it is determined that the foul prize winning switch 208a is on (S201: Yes), the ball entry flag 203h is set to ON (S202), the foul prize winning command is set (S203), and the foul prize winning command is set (S203). Go to processing.

By setting the ball entry flag 203h to ON in the process of S202, the game ball enters the foul winning hole 601 in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) executed in the main process of the main controller 110. can be detected. Also, the foul winning command set in the process of S203 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is , and is transmitted to the payout control device 111 . When the payout control device 111 receives the foul winning command, it controls the payout motor 216 so as to pay out the number of game balls (one ball in this embodiment) corresponding to the command.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, if it is determined that the foul prize winning switch 208a is off (S201: No), the processing of S202 and S203 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S204.

After completing the process of S201 or S203, it is determined whether or not the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S204). The timer counting flag 203n is turned on when it is determined that the ball entry flag is on (S1204 in FIG. 23) in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later. The ON state is continued until the period for judging the abnormality of ball entry (ball entry abnormality judgment period) elapses. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the ball entry abnormality determination period is set to 20 seconds. If it is determined in S204 that the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S204: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the shot ball detection switch 208b is ON (S205). The shot ball detection switch 208b is turned on when a game ball is shot and passes the shot ball detection switch 208b. In the process of S205, if it is determined that the shot ball detection switch 208b is ON (S205: Yes), the shot flag 203i is set to ON (S206), and the process proceeds to S207.

That is, when the game ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch 208b while the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S205: Yes), the shot flag 203i is set to ON (S206). ). As a result, the state of the shot ball detection switch can be read only during the period during which the ball entry abnormality determination is performed in which the number of shot balls must be counted, so that the processing load can be reduced. It should be noted that when counting the number of shot balls or detecting shot balls in other processing, the state of the shot ball detection switch is read even outside the ball entry abnormality determination period. good too.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is not ON (S204: No) and if it is determined that the shot ball detection switch 208b is not ON (S205: No), S206 Skip the process and move to the process of S207.

In the process of S207, other switch reading process is executed (S207). Other switches include, for example, detecting the entry of a ball into the above-described various ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 67) and various winning entrances (general winning entrance 63, specific winning entrance 65a). A touch sensor 51a, a stop switch 51b, and an operation amount detection switch 51c, which are input via the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, are included. When the ball sensor detects the entry of a game ball into various ball entrances or various winning holes, detection information (winning detection information) is stored based on the ball entering hole or winning hole. The winning detection information stored here is referred to in the external output process (see FIG. 22) executed in the main process of the main controller 110, and a prize ball command based on the winning detection information is transmitted to the payout control device 111. As a result, prize balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance or the prize winning opening. Also, based on the detection results of the touch sensor 51a, the stop switch 51b, and the operation amount detection switch 51c, it transmits a launch permission signal and a launch instruction signal to the launch control device.

The above-described various switches 208 (foul winning switch 208a, shot ball detection switch 208b, and other switches 208c) are set to OFF after being read in the switch reading process. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by continuously reading the states of the switches.

Further, in this embodiment, whether or not a game ball has entered the foul winning hole 601 is detected by the above-described switch reading process executed every 2 ms. That is, by detecting the state of the foul winning switch 208a every 2 ms, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, it takes 2 ms or longer for one game ball to pass through the foul winning switch 208a. Therefore, while the state of the foul prize winning switch 208a is detected by the switch reading process (for 2 ms), two or more game balls pass through the foul prize winning switch 208a, and the number of passing game balls cannot be calculated. ) can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 is configured to detect the state of the foul winning switch 208a, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it detect by the process of . Also, the interval for detecting the state of the foul prize winning switch 208a may be appropriately changed according to the time required for one game ball to pass through the foul prize winning switch 208a.

Further, the foul winning switch 208a of the present embodiment is configured to output a signal for each game ball even when game balls pass in a row. Specifically, the foul winning switch 208a is formed with a through hole (12 mm in diameter) that is one size larger than the game ball (11 mm in diameter), and has a structure in which two game balls cannot pass through at the same time. Therefore, when the game balls pass in a row, the game balls pass in a row in the horizontal direction with respect to the passing direction. Here, the foul prize winning switch 208a is provided with a detection section that detects a magnetic field that changes when a game ball passes through and outputs an electric signal corresponding to the magnitude of the magnetic field. The changing magnetic field changes according to the volume of the game ball in the detection range of the detection unit, and the detection range of the detection unit is narrower than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) in the passing direction of the game ball. It is configured to be a range. As a result, the magnetic field changes from "weak" to "strong" each time one game ball passes through, and then changes to "weak" again. As a result, even if the game balls pass in a row, the magnetic field (the electric signal corresponding to the magnetic field) changes to "weak" each time one ball passes, so the game balls pass in a row. Even in this case, the passage of game balls can be detected for each ball and a signal can be output.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S301). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S302: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of times N of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S304), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S304: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S304: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S305), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S306). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 21), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S306, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S307). In the process of S307, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S308). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S302, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S309). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S309: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S309, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S309: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S310). The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S308), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S310 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot (S311). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S311: Yes), jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S312). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S313), and the process proceeds to S316.

In the process of S311, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S311: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S314), and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 If it is above (S314: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203f (S315), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S314: No), the process of S315 is skipped and the process proceeds to S316.

After completing the process of S313 or S315, a stop command is set (S316), and the process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the stop command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes processing for stopping the variable display being executed with the stop type received by the stop type command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol variation start process (S308) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S308). This special symbol variation start process (S308) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S401).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S402). If the variable probability flag 203e is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state with special symbols, and if the value of the variable probability flag 203e is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state with special symbols.

If the value of the variable probability flag 203e is on (S402: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401 and the value for the high probability time (S403), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table. Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

On the other hand, in the process of S402, if the variable probability flag 203e is off (S402: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401 and , based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S404). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. One of "0" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. Determine that there is. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S403 or S404 is a special symbol jackpot (S405), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S405: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S406). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, It is determined what the jackpot type is among the jackpots B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot It is determined to be B (16R time-saving jackpot) (see FIG. 9(b)).

In the process of S406, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S407). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S407, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the big winning symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the variation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing special reach" are defined. , As a variation pattern for the jackpot, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified. Various types of "super reach" and various types of "common special reach" are defined.

In the process of S405, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S405: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S408). In the process of S408, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S409). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S407, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

When the process of S407 or the process of S409 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S407 or S409 is set (S410). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S406 or S408 is set (S411). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 21). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S411 ends, the special symbol variation start flag 203g indicating that it is time to start the special symbol variation is set to ON (S412), and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

By the special symbol variation start flag 203g set in the process of S412, it is determined that it is the variation start timing of the special symbol in the external output process (see FIG. 22) (see S1101 of FIG. 22), and the variation start timing of the special symbol (S1101 in FIG. 22: Yes), the variation pattern command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in S4010 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. (See S1103 in FIG. 22). The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command based on the received variation pattern command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the variation effect based on the received command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a start winning , is a process for executing pending processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is obtained (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S503: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and other commands executed in external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. In the process (see S1108 in FIG. 22), it is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S505, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) (S506), and the process ends. In the processing of S506, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In addition, in this starting winning process, the lottery result of the special symbol may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in advance from the values indicated by the various random number counters obtained based on the starting winning. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect based on the result of the lottery after the change, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 17, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and controls the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory, and the like. This is a process for

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the moment when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the moment when the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is being performed. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203f during time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). Incidentally, the time-saving medium counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols.

When the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning hole 65a. However, when the motorized accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 is opened, the ball that was intended to enter the specific prize winning opening 65 a enters the first ball entrance 64 . Therefore, it is intended to prevent the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 from being opened, thereby making it easier for the specific winning opening 65a to win. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the first ball-entering hole 64, even if the ball is prevented from entering the first ball-entering hole 64 during the special symbol jackpot, the first ball-entering hole 65a Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. - 特許庁As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64 becomes maximum (4 times).

In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not in effect (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 9(c)).

In the process of S608, when the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S608:No), it transfers to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low Based on the second winning random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 9(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S612: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is set to light up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is a special symbol jackpot. (S615). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening the electric accessary and the opening time are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so the first ball entrance. 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S614:No), it transfers to the process of S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the opening period of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 is set to 0. 2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the second symbol display device 83 changes The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. becomes easy.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 21) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 21) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed. is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second ball inlet 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of variable display in the normal symbol is reserved) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the process of S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 21), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001).

Here, the details of the external output processing (S1001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the external output process (S1001). This external output process (S1001) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 21), and is based on the presence or absence of various flags and winning detection information set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). It is a process for processing.

In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation start flag 203g is ON (S1101). In the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the special symbol variation start flag 203g is ON (S1101: Yes), it becomes the timing to start the variation of the special symbol, and the above-described special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 15) varies. Since the pattern command is set, the special variation start flag 203g is set to OFF (S1102), and the variation pattern command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1103). ). Then, the process proceeds to S1104.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 203g is off (S1101: No), since it is not the timing to start the variation of the special symbol, the processing of S1102 and S1103 is skipped, The process proceeds to S1104.

In the process of S1104, it is determined whether or not there is a foul winning command (S1104), and if it is determined that there is a foul winning command (S1104: Yes), the foul winning command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. At the same time, a signal is output to the terminal corresponding to the foul ball winning command of the external output terminal board 261 (S1105). When the payout control device 111 receives the foul winning command, the payout motor 216 is controlled to pay out a prize ball (one ball in this embodiment) corresponding to the command. On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that there is no foul winning command (S1104: No), the process of S1105 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1106.

In the process of S1106, it is determined whether or not there is an error command (S1106), and if it is determined that there is an error command (S1106: Yes), the error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the external A signal is output to the terminal corresponding to the error command on the output terminal board 261 (S1107). Here, the error command includes an error command (S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23) that is set in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later. The destination of the error command may be changed according to the type of the error command. For example, an error command for stopping the payout of prize balls may be sent to the payout control means 111. . Thus, by transmitting an error command for stopping the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 111 when fraud is detected, the payout by the payout control device 111 can be stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1106 that there is no error command (S1106: No), the process of S1107 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1108.

In the process of S1108, commands other than the commands described above are transmitted. As a command other than the above-described commands, for example, based on the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 12), if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is notified of the number of winning balls. Send prize ball command. In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 16). Further, the winning information command set in the startup winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, when the variation pattern command is transmitted by the processing of S1103 described above, after that, a stop type command for stopping the variation display of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. .

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. After finishing the processing of S1001, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is then updated (S1002). Specifically, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the first variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the game ball is illegally entered into the foul winning hole 601. A ball entry abnormality determination process for detecting fraud is executed (S1004).

Details of the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004). This ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the number of game balls that have been launched and the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning hole 601 are determined. This is a process for detecting an abnormal ball entry into the foul prize winning opening 601 or a fraudulent act based on the above.

In the ball entry abnormality determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S1201). The timer counting flag 203n is set to ON by the process of S1205, which will be described later, and is set to OFF after a predetermined time (20 seconds in this embodiment) has passed (S1218). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S1201: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the timer counter 203m for measuring the predetermined time, and the process proceeds to S1206.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is off (S1201: No), the entering ball flag 203h is on in order to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. It is determined whether or not there is (S1203). In the process of S1203, if it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is not ON (S1203: No), no game ball has entered the foul winning hole 601, and it is not the period during which ball entry abnormality determination is performed. End the process.

In the processing of S1203, if it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1203: Yes), the timer counter 203m is set to 5000 (equivalent to 20 seconds) to start the judgment of abnormal entry ( S1204), the timer counting flag 203n is set to ON (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

After completing the process of S1202 or S1205, it is determined whether or not the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1206). In the process of S1206, if it is determined that the ball entering flag 203h is ON (S1206: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the foul winning hole 601 during the ball entering abnormality determination period, so the number of entering balls is The counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1207), the entering ball flag 203h is set to OFF (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1206 that the entering ball flag 203h is off (S1206: No), the processes of S1207 and S1208 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1209.

In the processing of S1209, it is determined whether or not the firing flag 203i is ON (S1209). In the process of S1209, if it is determined that the shooting flag 203i is ON (S1209: Yes), it means that a game ball has been shot during the ball entry abnormality determination period, so the number of shot balls counter 203k is incremented by 1. (S1210), the firing flag 203i is set to OFF (S1211), and the process proceeds to S1212. On the other hand, in the processing of S1209, when it is determined that the firing flag 203i is off (S1209: No), the processing of S1210 and S1211 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1212.

Next, based on the entered ball number counter 203j corresponding to the number of game balls entered into the foul winning hole 601 and the shot ball number counter 203k corresponding to the number of fired game balls, a ball entry abnormality is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball-in counter 203j is greater than the value obtained by adding a predetermined value X (2 in this embodiment) to the value of the ball-in counter 203k (S1212). In the processing of S1212, as a result of comparing the number of game balls that have been normally shot with the number of game balls that have entered the foul prize winning opening 601, the game balls that have entered the foul prize winning opening 601 have been successfully shot. It is determined whether or not there are 2 more balls (more than 3 balls) than the game balls. If it is determined that there are many (S1212: Yes), an error command is set (S1213), assuming that an illegal act such as illegally entering a game ball into the foul winning opening 601 has been performed. The process proceeds to S1217.

Here, the reason why the predetermined value X is provided in the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the foul winning hole 601, the ball entry abnormality determination is started, and the shot ball number counter 203k and the ball entry counter 203j are counted. For this reason, the game ball that triggers the start of the entering ball abnormality determination is not counted by the shot ball number counter 203k. Also, at the timing when the ball entry abnormality determination is started, the game ball that has already been shot by the ball shooting unit 112a remains in the shooting passage 701, and the possibility that the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 is considered. be done. In consideration of such an expected error, a predetermined value X is set so that error processing is executed when an obvious abnormal state is detected. As a result, in the above-described case where the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than the value of the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k even though no fraudulent act has been executed, error processing is not executed. Unnecessary error notification can be suppressed. Note that the predetermined value X is not limited to the value described above, and may be a value smaller than 2 (eg 1) or a value larger than 2 (eg 5). Also, the predetermined value X may not be set.

The error command set in the process of S1213 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described external output process (see FIG. 22), and a signal is output to the corresponding terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command. be done. As a result, upon receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 can output sound and display a screen suggesting that the number of foul winnings is greater than the number of shot balls. In addition, since the signal output to the external output terminal plate 261 is detected by the hall computer 262, it is possible to inform hall employees or the like through the hall computer 262 that the number of foul winnings is greater than the number of shot balls. can.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1212 that there are not many (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than 10 (S1214). If the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than a predetermined value Y (10 in this embodiment) (S1214: Yes), the number of game balls entered into the foul winning hole 601 is greater than the number of game balls that have been shot. This is the case where the number of balls entering the foul winning hole 601 is large, although the number of balls does not increase. Here, when playing a game, if the player intends to play the game normally, more than 10 game balls do not enter the foul winning hole 601 within a predetermined time (20 seconds). Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1217.

The error command set by the process of S1215 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described external output process (see FIG. 22), and a signal is output to the corresponding terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command. be done. Thus, upon receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 can output sound and display a screen indicating that the number of foul winnings is large. In addition, since the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is detected by the hall computer 262, it is possible to inform hall employees or the like through the hall computer 262 that the number of foul winnings is large.

In the process of S1214, if it is determined that the number of entered balls counter 203j is equal to or less than the predetermined value Y (10) (S1214: No), a timer It is determined whether or not the counter 203m is 0 (S1216). If it is determined that the timer counter 203m is 0 (S1216: Yes), it is time to end the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), so the process proceeds to S1217, and it is determined that the timer counter 203m is not 0. If so (S1216: No), the ball entry abnormality determination is continued, so this process ends.

When the processing of S1213, S1215 or S1216 is completed, various counter values are reset (S1217). Specifically, when an error command is set by the processing of S1213 or S1215, or when it is determined that the timing of the end of the abnormal entrance determination period is reached by the processing of S1216 (S1216: Yes), the abnormal entrance determination is performed. In order to end the process, the incoming ball number counter 203j, the fired ball number counter 203k and the timer counter 203m are reset to zero. Next, the timer counting flag 203n is set to OFF (S1218), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004) of the present embodiment, an error command is set when an abnormality is determined during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds). . Thereby, the occurrence of an abnormality can be detected early. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, it may be configured to determine whether or not there is an abnormality after the passage of the entrance abnormality determination period (20 seconds). In this case, since the abnormality can be determined after acquiring the information necessary for the abnormality determination for the entrance abnormality determination period (20 seconds), the accuracy of the abnormality determination can be improved, and unnecessary abnormality notification can be performed. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 and the number of game balls that have been shot are counted in the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be counted in other processing such as processing executed in timer interrupt processing.

In addition, the method of determining abnormality in ball entry is not limited to the methods and combinations described above. etc. may be added. Another abnormality determination is, for example, a case in which the interval at which game balls enter the foul prize winning opening 601 is earlier on average than the interval at which game balls can be shot (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). etc.

Further, the trigger for starting the ball entry abnormality determination is not limited to the entry of the game ball into the foul winning opening 601, and may be measured at predetermined time intervals, for example.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine an abnormality by counting the game balls that have entered the foul winning prize opening 601 and the game balls that have been fired. 1 ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 67, etc.) or the out port 66 may be counted to determine the abnormality. For example, the count number of game balls that entered the foul winning opening 601 and the count number of game balls that hit the game area without entering the foul winning opening 601 with respect to the count number of fired game balls. may be judged to be abnormal when the total value of .

Furthermore, if there is a continuous entry into the foul winning hole 601 and the ball entry abnormality determination is executed again (when the entry abnormality determination period starts again after the entrance abnormality determination period ends), the fraudulent act will occur. likely to be done. On the other hand, when the entering ball abnormality determination period starts immediately after the start of the game, there is a high possibility that the player erroneously made a foul winning when he started hitting. Therefore, in the first ball entry abnormality determination after the start of the game, the threshold value for determining that the ball entry abnormality is determined to be high (for example, 15 or more balls are determined to be abnormal in S1214) to make the abnormality determination difficult. In the abnormal ball entry determination, the threshold for determining abnormal ball entry may be set low (for example, 5 or more balls are determined to be abnormal in S1214) to make it easier to make an abnormal determination. This makes it possible to accurately detect fraud while suppressing unnecessary error reporting. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to increase the number of determination items for determination of ball entry abnormality from the first time onward (for example, the first time is determined by S1212 only, and the first transition is determined by S1212 and S1214). The thresholds and determination items may be changed step by step in subsequent ball entry abnormality determination. Also, after the timer counter reaches 0 (S1216: Yes in FIG. 23), the number of entering ball counters increases from a predetermined value Y (10 in this embodiment) while the timer count flag is on (during the period for determining abnormality in entering balls). A process of determining whether or not the number is greater than a small predetermined value Z (eg, 5) may be added. Through these processes as well, it is possible to improve the effect of being able to accurately detect fraud while suppressing unnecessary error reporting.

Also, in the present embodiment, only one error command is set, but error commands may be set in a plurality of stages according to the degree of possibility that an illegal game is being played. In such a case, in addition to the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process, determination may be made using a pattern in which the determination value (determination value) is set low. By doing so, in addition to outputting that an illegal game is being played, a slight error command such as a situation in which the player has erroneously operated the operating handle 51 or a malfunction of the operating handle 51 can be set. , to the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to give a game explanation ("Please turn the operation handle more") by voice or liquid crystal display, or to notify a malfunction of the operation handle.

Specifically, the timing at which the player operates the operation handle 51 to change the firing intensity (at the start of the game, at the start of the right-handed hitting game, at the end of the right-handed hitting game, etc.) is set as the timing at which the abnormal entry process is started. , and counts the number of game balls entering the foul prize winning opening 601 during a predetermined period. If the counted value is greater than a predetermined value, there is a possibility that the launcher may be malfunctioning, so an output to that effect is made possible. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible not only to monitor fraudulent games, but also to determine malfunctions of the operating handle 51.例文帳に追加Incidentally, when performing both defect determination of the operation handle 51 and monitoring of illegal games, it is preferable to store a plurality of determination results of the ball entry abnormality determination process in time series and perform determination. In other words, if a ball enters the foul prize winning opening 601 due to a malfunction of the operating handle 51, it will occur repeatedly unless the operating handle 51 is repaired. because it occurs within a specified period of time.

Desirably, the determination value for the abnormal entry determination based on the illegal game is strict and the period used for the determination is shortened, and the abnormality determination based on the malfunction of the operation handle 51 It is preferable that the determination value for determination is sweeter than the value for determination of illegal game and the period used for determination is lengthened. By doing so, both can be determined.

Also, the timing of changing the firing intensity is the timing at which the abnormal ball entry process is started. The reason why the predetermined time has passed is that it prevents the detection of game balls that have been shot before the firing intensity is changed, and also prevents game balls that have been shot before the firing intensity is changed and the firing intensity is changed. This is to prevent the game ball from reaching an unintended area and detecting such a game ball by colliding with the game ball launched after being hit.

The timing for judging the malfunction of the operating handle 51 is not limited to the timing described above, and may be performed at all times, or may be performed during a state in which a firing instruction is given so that the firing intensity is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

In addition, it is preferable to change the content of notification to the outside when a malfunction of the operation handle is determined according to the game state (whether or not a big win is in progress, etc.). For example, if the jackpot is in progress, it is preferable to raise the notification priority so that the store clerk will come to the store as soon as possible. The process of changing the content of notification in this way may be performed by the main controller using information based on the determination result of the abnormal ball entry determination and information based on the gaming state of the gaming machine, or may be performed by the main controller using voice obtained by acquiring each information. The lamp controller may do this. Furthermore, a storage means may be provided for storing information based on the fact that the malfunction of the operating handle is determined during the jackpot.

In the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process, the number of balls entered into the foul winning opening 601 is counted, and the ball entry abnormality determination is performed based on the counting result. It is also conceivable to perform such control.

That is, the entry flag 203h and the launch flag 203i may be constantly read from the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and entry abnormality determination may be performed based on the timing at which each flag is turned on.

Specifically, when the ball entry flag 203h is turned on while the shooting flag 203i is not turned on, it is determined that the ball entry is abnormal. This determines the state in which the game ball has entered the foul prize winning opening 601 although the game ball has not been shot.

In addition, since it takes a predetermined time (approximately 2 seconds) from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the foul winning hole 601, the firing flag 203i is turned on a predetermined time before the timing when the firing flag 203i is turned on. It is preferable to determine whether or not. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably determine the ball entry abnormality.

Furthermore, at the timing when the game ball is entered into the foul prize winning opening 601, that is, at the timing when the ball entry flag 203h is turned on, timing of a predetermined time is started, and until the predetermined time (0.6 seconds) elapses, It is preferable to determine that the game ball has entered the foul winning hole 601 . By doing so, it is possible to detect the state in which the game ball enters the foul prize winning opening 601 at a timing shorter than the game ball shooting interval (0.6 seconds) by the operation handle 51 .

It should be noted that when foul balls are generated continuously, it is conceivable that the foul balls are strung together in the launch path 701, so the predetermined time may be set as appropriate, and may be shorter than 0.6 seconds. Further, it is also possible to determine whether the game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 multiple times within a predetermined period of time. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of monitoring fraudulent games.

In addition, a game area reaching ball detection switch (not shown) for detecting that the shot game ball has reached the game area is provided near the terminal end of the shooting path 701. Based on the detection results of the three switches of the game area reaching ball detection switch, the passing situation of the launched game ball may be detected. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of monitoring whether the detection result of the foul prize winning switch 208a is due to the normal game or the illegal game.

Specifically, the game ball detected by the shot ball detection switch 208a passes either the foul winning switch 208a or the game area reaching ball detection switch after a predetermined time. Therefore, when the shooting ball detection switch 208a detects a game ball, it starts timing a predetermined time. is determined to be normal, and when both the foul winning switch 208a and the game area reaching ball detection switch detect the game ball at other timings, that is, within the predetermined time, and when the foul ball is detected outside the predetermined time When the winning switch 208 detects a game ball, the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process is started. By doing so, it is possible to determine the state in which the game ball detected by the shot ball detection switch 208a has reached the game area, that is, the fact that the game is being played illegally while the game is being played normally. Become.

When such control is used, it is preferable to provide a plurality of areas (capable of storing four balls) for storing the detection results of the ball detection switch 208b. This is because, after being detected by the shot ball detection switch 208b, a newly shot game ball hits the shot ball detection switch 208b until it passes through the foul prize winning switch 208a or the game area reaching ball detection switch. in order to pass.

As described above, by providing a switch for detecting the passage of the game ball at each position of the launch path and detecting the detection status of each switch, even without the function of counting the detection result of each switch, It is possible to achieve the same purpose and effect as the ball entry abnormality determination process described in the present embodiment. In addition, in the description of the control described above, the description of the same points as the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) of the present embodiment is omitted. ) or may be provided independently.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. When the process of S1004 is finished, next, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot effect is executed, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is executed (S1005). . In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has elapsed and whether or not a specified number of balls have won. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

In the jackpot control process (S1005), a command based on the jackpot state of the special symbol is set. For example, an opening command is set when a special symbol jackpot starts, and an ending command is set when a special symbol jackpot ends.

The jackpot-related command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a jackpot-related command, it transmits a corresponding display command to the display control device 114 . When the display command is received by the display control device 114, the corresponding big win-related effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

Further, when it is determined whether it is time to start a new round in the jackpot game, the specific winning opening 65a is opened. Incidentally, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round, a round number command indicating the number of rounds may be set and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the start timing of a new round, and can change the music and performance in accordance with the start of the new round.

Further, at the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203e and the counter 203f during time saving are set based on the type of the jackpot of the special symbol being executed. Specifically, when the jackpot game by the jackpot A (variable probability jackpot) is executed, the variable probability flag 203e is set to ON, and when the jackpot game by the jackpot B (time-saving jackpot) is executed, during the time saving A counter 203f is set to 100; As a result, the variable probability game state is provided based on the big win A, and the time saving game state is provided based on the big win B.例文帳に追加

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 17), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S616 or S617 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S407 or the process of S409 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S407 or the process of S409 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) ends, the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S406 or S408 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 17), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 19 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the initial startup processing (see FIG. 20) can be performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the setting process (S901), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 24, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag 223x is turned on, the power-off processing in S1416 (Fig. 25 ) is started during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 25), it executes power-off processing in S1416. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag 223x is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag 223x is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1416 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag 223x.

If the power-off processing flag 223x is off (S1302: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely cut off, or the power supply in S1416 was started after a momentary power failure occurred. It was started after the execution of the power-off process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). is. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), it will transfer to S1304 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1416 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S1416, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1416 is executed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S1416 is executed, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1416 has been completed after a power failure has occurred. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1310). Thereafter, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1311), interrupt permission is set (S1312), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309 and S1310, which are clearing processing of the working area of the RAM 223, are skipped, and the processing is shifted to S1311. After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1311), is set (S1312), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process of S1308 is reached from S1304 via the process of S1306, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1411. In the process of S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1402 to S1411 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1412, the variable display setting process of S1413, and the counter value updating process of S1413 and S1414 are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1413 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1403 to S1413 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1402 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1408 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1407 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1408), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S1410, command determination processing is executed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S1411). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After finishing the process of S1412, a variable display setting process is executed in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1412). Specifically, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1412 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1413). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1413 (S1413: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag 223x are turned on (S1415), and the power-off processing is executed (S1416). . After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag 223x is turned off (S1417), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S1413 (S1413: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1414), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1414: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1414: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1411). This command determination process (S1411) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Further, in this process, when a command for the number of reserved balls is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1501). When the variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1503), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 27) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1501: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 27) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), then it is determined whether or not an error command has been received from main controller 110 (S1507). Then, when an error command is received (S1507: Yes), error processing (setting of error command for display, etc.) according to the received command is executed (S1508), and this processing ends.

Here, as an error command in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of foul winnings is larger than the number of shot balls in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) executed by the main controller 110 and an error command (S1215) that is set when it is determined that the number of balls entering the foul winning opening 601 is large.

Specifically, in the process of S1508, when the error command set by the process of S1213 is received, the setting is made to output a voice saying "The number of fouls is greater than the number of shots", The number of fouls is greater than the number.” is set as a display error command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加Also, when the error command set by the processing of S1215 is received, it is set to output a voice saying "The number of fouls is large", and the characters "The number of fouls is large" are displayed in the third pattern. A display error command to be displayed on the device 81 is set. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the set sound may be an alarm sound (for example, "beep beep" sound), and the third symbol display device 81 may display a specific image instead of characters (for example, an image indicating the occurrence of an abnormality). ) may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified to surrounding players in a recognizable manner, but is not limited to this, and is notified in a manner recognizable only to hall employees (for example, A specific LED may emit light), or the occurrence of an abnormality may be notified only by the hall computer without using sound or screen display. As a result, fraud can be monitored without being detected by the player.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1402) of the main processing (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display error command, the third pattern display device 81 starts displaying an error corresponding to the command.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, if an error command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1509). ) and return to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is sent to the display control device 114. Set the command to send to Other commands include, for example, the above-mentioned opening command, reserved ball count command, and the like.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1412). This variable display setting process (S1412) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1601: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1606. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1603).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1604). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

After completing the process of S1604, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1606.

In the process of S1606, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1606). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S1606: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display setting process is terminated. Return to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1606: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1607), and then in the processing of S1506 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 26), The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1608).

Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1609). exit. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

As described above, in the first embodiment, regarding the handling of foul balls that occur when a player plays a game, the foul prize winning opening 601 is provided, and the game can be played again by paying out the prize balls. Since it is provided, there is no need to provide a dedicated path for returning foul balls as in the past. It is possible to increase the degree. In particular, when the foul prize winning port 601 is provided on the game board 13 and the payout control device 111, the upper tray 17, and the ball shooting unit 112a are provided on the inner frame 12 side, the components are moved from the game board 13 side to the inner frame 12 side. It is necessary to provide a path for returning the foul ball so as to straddle it, which is more effective in such a game machine.

In addition, the foul ball can be easily diverted from the launch path 701 by providing the foul winning opening 601 at a position in the launch path 701 that utilizes the flow of the foul ball's own weight.

Furthermore, since the branch path to the foul prize winning opening 601 is provided so as to avoid the area through which the game balls shot by the ball shooting unit 112a pass, the game is not hindered.

In addition, even if the foul prize winning port 601 is provided at a position closer to the ball shooting unit 112a than the prize winning port provided in the game area, the structure for preventing cheating by the game ball with string and the control for monitoring the cheating are provided. , it is possible to deal with fraud.

<First modification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 28 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The first modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed, the guide member is removed, and the paths of game balls that can enter the foul winning opening 601 are increased. They are identical in other respects. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the first modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul ball that flows down the second opening 604 flows into the foul winning opening 601 provided within the game area. It is configured to enter the ball. In addition, among the game balls that have reached the game area from the first opening 603 of the launch path 701, the game balls with extremely weak launch strength flow down the special flow path provided on the inner peripheral side of the inner rail 61 and enter the foul winning opening 601. It is possible to win a prize.

The flow of game balls in launch path 701 will be described. A game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 to reach the outer rail 62, and then is guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. In other words, in the first modification, the game ball that is fired passes along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, so the inner peripheral side of the launch path where the fired game ball cannot enter is provided with a second opening.

As described above, since the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls in the first modified example, the guide member 605 need not be provided.

A foul ball generated at the end of the launch path 701 flows down the launch path and is guided to the second opening 604 by the guide member 602 .

As described above, in the first modification, in the configuration in which the foul prize winning opening 601 into which a foul ball can enter is provided, the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a smoothly reaches the game area. No need to add new configuration. Also, even if the game ball reaches the game area, it is possible to handle the game ball that has been shot at a position unsuitable for the game due to its extremely weak launch strength, like a foul ball. In order to more reliably guide a foul ball generated above the second opening 604 to the second opening 604, it is preferable to provide the second opening 604 at the upper left chord position. By doing so, the weight of the foul ball works and the ball flows down to the second opening 604 more reliably.

<Second modification>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed, and FIG. The second modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the second modification, a second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and a foul ball flowing down through the second opening 604 flows into the foul winning opening 601 provided within the game area. It is configured to enter the ball. Further, a foul ball entry path 606 guides a foul ball to a foul ball winning opening 601 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 30). The game board 13 is made of highly transparent acrylic resin so that the player can see game balls flowing down the back side of the game board 13 .

The flow of game balls in launch path 701 will be described. A game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 to reach the outer rail 62, and then is guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. That is, in the second modification, since the game ball that is fired passes along the outer peripheral side of the firing path, the inner peripheral side of the firing path where the fired game ball cannot enter is provided with a second opening.

As described above, in the second modified example, since the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, the need for providing the guide member 605 is eliminated.

A foul ball generated at the end of the launch path 701 flows down the launch path and is guided to the second opening 604 by the guide member 602 . Next, the configuration in which the game ball guided by the guide member 602 flows down to the foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area will be described with reference to FIG.

30(a) is an enlarged view of the region XXIX in FIG. 29, FIG. 30(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXXa-XXXa in FIG. 30(a), and FIG. FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a); A foul ball generated at the terminal end of the launch area 701 flows down between the guide member 602 and the inner rail 61 and is guided onto the ball receiving member 606a. The ball receiving member 606a is inclined downward toward the right side in the front view of FIG. (See FIG. 30(c)). Therefore, the game ball on the ball receiving member 606a passes through the second opening 604 provided in the game board 13 along the formed downward slope (see FIG. 30(b)). A game ball that has passed through the second opening 604 rolls on a passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board 13, is discharged to the game area from a discharge port 600d provided in the game area of the game board 13, and wins a prize for a foul ball. It is led to mouth 601 . In addition, in the second modified example, the game board is molded from highly transparent acrylic resin, and the passage 606c is also molded from the same material. It is configured to be visible from the side.

By providing the structure for guiding the foul ball to the foul prize winning opening 601 on the back surface of the game board 13 instead of the front surface as in the second modification, the front space of the game board 13, that is, the range of the game area is limited. Since the number of games is expanded, it becomes easier to incorporate devices for improving the interest of the game.

In the second modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul prize winning opening 601 is provided in the game area of the game board 13, but it may be provided in another location. . For example, the second opening 604 may be provided on the outer peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul winning opening 601 may be provided on the lower right region of the game board 13 (see FIG. 32). By doing so, it is not necessary to provide the foul prize winning opening 601 for entering a foul ball into the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13 . Further, by lengthening the distance of the path 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent cheating aiming at the foul prize winning opening 601.例文帳に追加

In addition, the launch path 701 is configured with a depth that allows two game balls to pass in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a is located on the back side (game board 13 side). It may be configured so that it can be fired while maintaining a space that allows the ball to pass through. By doing so, when an opening is provided in the game board 13, the passage width direction of the launch path 701 can be narrowed, and the left-right direction (width direction) of the game board 13 can be effectively used. I can.

<Third modification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification will be described. FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The third modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the third modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul ball that flows down the second opening 604 passes between the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. The configuration is such that the ball passes through the second opening 604 formed therebetween and enters the foul winning opening 601 .

The flow of game balls in launch path 701 will be described. A game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 to reach the outer rail 62, and then is guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. That is, in the third modification, since the game ball that has been shot passes along the outer peripheral side of the shooting path, the shot game ball cannot enter the inner peripheral side of the shooting path. is provided with a second opening.

As described above, in the second modified example, since the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, the need for providing the guide member 605 is eliminated.

Further, the inner rail 61 is divided into a first inner rail 61a and a second inner rail 61b, and a gap large enough for one game ball to pass is formed between the lower end of the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. By providing it between the top end of the , the gap forms the second opening 604 , and the foul ball can enter the foul prize winning opening 601 without using the guide member 602 .

<Fourth modification>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The fourth modified example is a further modified example of the second modified example described above, and differs in that the position of the second opening 604 and the position of the foul prize winning opening 601 are changed, and that a guide member 605 is added, They are identical in other respects. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the fourth modification, the second opening 604 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the foul ball flowing down the second opening 604 is provided in the lower right area of the game board 13. It is configured to enter the ball into the mouth 601 . Further, a foul ball entry path 606 guides a foul ball to a foul ball winning opening 601 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 30). The game board 13 is made of highly transparent acrylic resin so that the player can see game balls flowing down the back side of the game board 13 . In addition, since the passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board is provided from the left end to the right end of the game board 13, the game ball path from the ball launching unit 112a to the foul winning opening 601 can be provided in the game area. It can be longer than the mouth (not shown), and it is possible to prevent cheating to the foul prize winning mouth 601 .

The flow of game balls in launch path 701 will be described. The game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 and reaches the guide member 605. After that, the game ball rolled along the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 to reach the game area. led to. In other words, in the fourth modified example, the shot game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the second opening 604 and reaches the game area. A foul ball generated on the terminal end side of the launch path 701 passes through the second opening provided at the lower left chord position of the launch path 701 due to its own weight.

By providing the structure for guiding the foul ball to the foul prize winning opening 601 on the back surface of the game board 13 instead of the front surface as in the fourth modification, the front space of the game board 13, that is, the range of the game area is limited. Since the number of games is expanded, it becomes easier to incorporate devices for improving the interest of the game.

Further, by doing so, it is not necessary to provide the foul prize winning opening 601 for entering a foul ball into the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13 . Further, by lengthening the distance of the path 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent cheating aiming at the foul prize winning opening 601.例文帳に追加

<Fifth Modification>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The fifth modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the position where the ball launching unit 903 is installed and the accompanying changes are made, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 described in the fifth modification, the game balls used in the game are recovered through a recovery path 901, and the recovered game balls are transported by a lift 902 to launch a ball provided on the upper left of the pachinko machine 10. It is a game machine of a system in which a game ball is lifted to a unit 903 and a game ball is shot to a game area by a shooting solenoid 904 .

In such a pachinko machine 10, there is no need to provide a shooting path 701 for causing game balls to reach the game area, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be utilized as a game area to the maximum. However, since the game ball is shot from the shooting solenoid provided on the upper left of the pachinko machine 10, there is no space for a member (shooting rail 801 in the first embodiment) for stabilizing the shot game ball. There is a risk that the shot game balls will vary. Therefore, a foul winning opening 601 is provided in a specific area where game balls unsuitable for playing in the game area flow down. By doing so, the player can play the game again without making a game ball shot to a specific area other than the predetermined position useless even though the player aims at the predetermined position. can be made

<Sixth modification>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. In the sixth modification, the foul ball winning opening 601 is used for the purpose of making the game play again as a result of a game with a game ball falling under its own weight in the game area (so-called replay function), in addition to the purpose of entering a foul ball. ), and is capable of providing new amusement. The sixth modified example is a further modified example of the first modified example described above. The difference is that the path to the ball is changed, but the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals or the illustration thereof is omitted, and the detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 is equipped with various components similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, but illustration thereof is omitted.

In the sixth modification, a plurality (two) of second openings 604 are provided, and by quickly branching off the foul ball generated within the firing path 701 from the firing path 701, the foul ball is shot by the ball firing unit 112a. It prevents collision with the game ball. In addition, a buffer member 608 for preventing damage to the guide member 602 while preventing the game ball that has fallen from the game area from entering the shooting path 701 from the second opening 604 is attached to the second opening 604. is provided.

The flow of game balls in the characteristic launch path 701 of the sixth modification will be described. The game ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the shooting rail 801 and reaches the guide member 605. After that, the game ball rolled along the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 to reach the game area. led to. In other words, in the fourth modified example, the shot game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the second opening 604 and reaches the game area. A foul ball generated on the terminal end side of the launch path 701 passes through the second opening provided at the lower left chord position of the launch path 701 due to its own weight.

Although a plurality of modified examples have been shown above, other configurations may be used without being limited to these. For example, the inner rail 61 or the outer rail 62 forming the launch path 701 may be integrally provided with a member forming the foul prize winning opening 601 , or the foul prize winning opening 601 may be provided in the launch path 701 .

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment and the first to sixth modifications, which are modifications of the first embodiment, a foul prize winning opening 601 is provided to allow a foul ball to enter, and the shot intensity does not reach the game area. It is configured such that the launched game ball is returned to the player as a prize ball based on the ball entering the foul prize winning opening 601.例文帳に追加

In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to be able to detect fraud such as illegal entry of balls into the foul prize winning port 601 based on the number of balls entering the foul prize winning port 601 and the number of game balls launched. ing. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the control processing of the first embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the firing intensity is adjusted so as to become a foul ball.

Specifically, in a game state (right-handed game state) premised on firing to the right side of the game area such as a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 causes the game ball to the right side of the game area. When the intensity is insufficient for shooting (in this control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the shooting intensity (in this control example, the operation amount corresponds to 20%) that the game ball to be shot becomes a foul ball. Adjust the firing intensity to

As a result, the game ball is not shot to the left side of the game area due to the player's operation error, etc., in spite of the right-handed game state, and the game ball is unnecessarily consumed and unintended winning. It is possible to suppress disadvantages to the player such as inviting

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the game machine in the second embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 35, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the content of a part of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the other points are the same. Specifically, the difference is that the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is newly provided with a launch permission flag 203r and a handle operation amount 203s. Other points are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The firing permission flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not to permit firing. When the firing permission flag 203r is ON, it indicates that firing is permitted. , indicates that the fire is not allowed. This firing permission flag 203r is turned on when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110. (S222 in FIG. 36). Then, when the shooting control process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 is referred to, and the shooting permission flag 203r is ON, the game ball is shot from the ball shooting unit 112a. , and transmits a firing command to the payout control device 111 . When the payout control device 111 receives the firing command, it transmits the firing command to the firing control device 112 based on the command, and the firing control device 112 fires the game ball based on the received firing command. 112a.

The operation amount storage area 203s is an area for storing the operation amount of the operation handle 51, and a value of 0 to 100 is stored. This value indicates the operating position (angle from the origin position) relative to the movable range (movable angle) of the operating handle 51 in percentage. For example, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 0, it indicates that the operation handle 51 is not operated (it is at the origin position), and when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 100, the operation handle 51 is fully opened (operable upper limit position).

When the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110, the operation amount storage area 203s The above-described launch permission flag 203r is set to ON (see S222 in FIG. 36), and the operation amount detection switch 51c is stored in the operation amount storage area 203s (see S223 in FIG. 36). Then, it is referenced in the firing control process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110, and the firing command is set based on the value of the manipulated variable storage area 203s (see S2005 in FIG. 37). ). Further, in this control example, when the game state is right-handed, and the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80, the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is assumed to be 20, and the firing command is set. As a result, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is insufficient to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area (in this control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the game ball to be shot is fouled. The firing intensity can be adjusted so as to form a sphere (in this control example, the operation amount is 20%).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing of main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the switch reading process and the firing control process are partially changed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the details of the switch reading process (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the switch reading process (S101). In the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the launch permission flag 203r and the value of the operation amount storage area 203s are set based on the states of the touch sensor 51a and the stop flag 51b. They are different and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the switch reading process, first, the processes from S201 to S206 are executed as in the first embodiment. Next, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 51a is on (S220). In the processing of S220, if it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is not turned on (S220: No), it means that the game ball is about to be shot without being based on the player's operation, and the game ball is shot illegally. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball is about to be shot, the process from S221 to SS223 is skipped so as not to permit the shooting of the game ball, and the process proceeds to S207.

On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is on (S220: Yes), it means that the game ball is about to be shot based on the player's operation, so the stop switch is pressed next. 51b is off (S221). In the process of S221, if it is determined that the stop switch 51b is ON (S221), it means that the player has turned on the stop switch 51b to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball. , the process of S222 and SS223 is skipped so as not to permit the shooting of the game ball, and the process proceeds to S207.

In the process of S221, when it is determined that the stop switch 51 is off (S221: No), the process proceeds to S222 in order to permit the shooting of the game ball. In the process of S222, the firing permission flag 203r is set to ON (S222), the value of the operation amount detection switch 51c is stored in the operation amount storage area 203s (S223), and the process proceeds to S207.

In the process of S207, as in the first embodiment described above, other switches are read and the process ends.

Next, details of the firing control process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the firing control process (S108). The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the shooting intensity of the game ball is adjusted when the game state is the right-handed game state, and the other parts are the same. is. As for the same parts, since there are parts where the details of the processing are specified in this control example, those parts will also be explained.

In the firing control process, first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag 203r is ON (S2001). As described above, the firing permission flag 203r is set to ON when the touch sensor 51a is ON and the stop switch 51b is OFF in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) ( See S222 in FIG. 36).

In the process of S2001, if it is determined that the launch permission flag 203r is off (S2001: No), the player has not operated the operation handle 51, or the game ball is about to be launched illegally. , and the game ball is not shot, so the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the launch permission flag 203r is ON (S2001: Yes), the process proceeds to S2002 in order to shoot the game ball. In the processing of S2002, it is determined whether or not it is in the right-handed game state (S2002). Specifically, in this control example, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), the probability variable flag 203e is set to ON to give the probability variable gaming state, and the jackpot B (16R short-time jackpot) After the end of the jackpot game based on, the time saving game state is given by setting the counter 203f to 100 during time saving. In this probability variation gaming state or time saving gaming state, the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area, so that the player becomes a right-handed gaming state where the game is played. Whether it is 1 or more determines whether or not it is a right-handed game state.

In the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the game is not in the right-handed game state (S2002: No), in order to execute normal firing control, the firing command is set based on the value of the operation amount storage area 203s, and the firing command of S2006 Go to processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, when it is determined that the game state is right-handed (S2002: Yes), the operation amount storage area 203s is stored in order to determine whether or not it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball. is in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003). Here, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is less than 30 (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is less than 30%), the shooting intensity is weak, and the shot game ball does not reach the game area. This is the case where the ball enters the foul prize winning opening 601 at the second time. Further, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 80 or more (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 80% or more), the shooting intensity is high, and the shot game ball is shot to the right side of the game area. is the case.

When the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80 (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 30% or more and less than 80%), although the shot game ball reaches the game area, This is the case when the ball is shot to the left side of the game area, but the right side of the game area is not reached (or is difficult to reach).

Therefore, in the process of S2003, if it is determined that the value of the manipulated variable storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003: Yes), the value of the manipulated variable storage area is set to 20, and the firing command is set ( S2004), the process proceeds to S2006. Thereby, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is the operation amount (30% to 80%) at which the shot game ball is shot to the left side of the game area, the operation amount is adjusted to 20%. The game ball is shot with a shooting intensity (that is, a shooting intensity that becomes a foul ball). Therefore, in the right-handed game state, game balls are unnecessarily shot to the left side of the game area, and unintended winning can be prevented. In addition, a game ball that has become a foul ball enters the foul winning hole 601 and is returned as a prize ball (one ball), so unnecessary game ball launch (shooting to the left side of the game area) ), game balls are not consumed unnecessarily.

In this control example, the shooting intensity is adjusted to 20%. However, the shooting intensity is not limited to this. . Also, since the intensity of the shot to the right side of the game area and the intensity of the shot to become a foul ball may differ depending on the configuration of the game board 13, for example, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 40 to 70 Alternatively, the emission intensity may be adjusted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2003, if it is determined that the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is not in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003: No), the launch strength is weak, and the launched game ball does not reach the game area and is fouled. When the ball enters the winning hole 601, or when the shooting intensity is high and the shot game ball is shot to the right side of the game area, the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is set to execute normal shooting control. , and the process proceeds to S2006.

After completing the process of S2004 or S2005, the launch permission flag 203r is set to OFF (S2006), and this process ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in the right-handed game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is insufficient to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area (in this control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the shooting intensity is adjusted so that the shot game ball becomes a foul ball (in this control example, the shooting intensity corresponding to the operation amount of 20%). As a result, the game ball is not shot to the left side of the game area due to the player's operation error, etc., in spite of the right-handed game state, and the game ball is unnecessarily consumed and unintended winning. It is possible to suppress disadvantages to the player such as inviting

In addition, a winning hole for one prize ball is provided in the game area, and in a game state in which the direction in which the game ball is shot is specified (for example, right-handed state), the game ball is shot in a direction other than the specified direction. While the shooting intensity is set, the shooting intensity may be forcibly changed so that one prize ball enters the winning hole by the shooting control process. As described above, while the firing intensity is being corrected by the firing control process, it is preferable to guide the player so that the operation of the operating handle 51 provides the correct firing intensity. By doing so, the player can quickly operate the operation handle 51 so as to obtain an appropriate firing intensity.

In this control example, the main controller 110 is configured to adjust the firing intensity, but the present invention is not limited to this. You can do it. As a result, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, in the case of the right-handed game state, it is configured to adjust the shooting intensity of the game ball, but it is not limited to this, and in the case of the left-handed game state, the shooting intensity of the game ball is adjusted. In this way, the game ball may be shot to the right side of the game area due to the player's operation error, etc., and the shooting intensity to be adjusted according to the game state may be changed (for example, when playing a left-handed game (Adjusted to be left-handed, and adjusted to be right-handed during right-handed games).

Furthermore, in this control example, the shooting intensity is adjusted according to the game state, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the shooting intensity may be adjusted according to the state of the ball shooting unit 112a. Specifically, the ball shooting unit 112a is not ready to shoot the ball (transient response of electrical elements, delay due to control processing, etc.), for example, even though the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 60% First, when a game ball can only be shot with a shooting intensity of 50%, the shooting intensity is adjusted to 20% to make it a foul ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from being fired into the game area with a launch strength unintended by the player, and disadvantages to the player, such as unnecessary consumption of game balls and unintended winnings, are suppressed. can do.

Further, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A) is awarded, the above-described firing intensity may be adjusted. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the privilege given by the big win, and to improve the interest of the player.

In each of the embodiments and modifications described above, output processing based on various determination processing is performed by the main controller 110, but all the output information is Also, even if the determination process is performed by a device other than the main controller 110, all information based on the determination result is output to the sound lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal board 261 It is configured to be possible. In addition, the output information can be identifiably notified to the outside. There is a connected display unit and the like.

It should be noted that the present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

All or part of the above embodiments and modifications may be combined. Further, although the sub-controllers such as the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are used, all the functions may be integrated into the main controller 110 .

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (foul ball prize)
It has a game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area, and a path capable of guiding the shot balls shot by the shooting means to the game area. a launch path; guiding means for guiding game balls that have flowed backward along the launch path without reaching the game area from the launch path to a specific area; and a game guided to the specific area. A specific ball entry means capable of entering a ball, and an imparting means for imparting a game value equivalent to at least one game ball each time one game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Characterized game machine A1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a shooting device for shooting game balls into a game area, and a game ball (so-called foul) that does not reach the game area among the game balls shot by the shooting means. Equipped with a ball recovery device that recovers the ball). A gaming machine is known in which the game balls recovered by this ball recovery device flow down a ball path provided in the gaming machine and are returned to the player again (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 9-308730). In this case, it is necessary to provide a separate ball path for returning foul balls to the player. There is a problem that the inside of the game machine becomes complicated in order to secure it. Moreover, there was a problem that the manufacturing cost increased.

According to the gaming machine A1, a game ball that has reversed the launch path without reaching the game area is entered into the specific ball entering means, and a game value equivalent to at least one ball is played based on the entering ball. Since it is possible to give a foul ball to a player, there is no need to separately provide a ball path for returning the foul ball to the player in the game machine, and the structure in the game machine can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need to secure a space for providing a dedicated ball path for returning a foul ball to the player in the game machine.

In the game machine A1, the guiding means has a guiding piece that can be changed between a first state that can guide the game ball to the specific area and a second state that restricts the guidance to the specific area, and the guiding piece is always arranged on the shooting path in the first state, and is changed to the second state by coming into contact with a game ball shot from the shooting means to the game area. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball fired from the launching means to the game area comes into contact with the guiding means, the guiding means is changed to the second state that restricts the guidance to the specific area, so that the game ball is released from the shooting means to the game area. To prevent a situation in which a shot game ball is guided to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the foul ball can be guided to the specific area without interfering with the normal game.

In the game machine A2, a specific opening communicating with the specific area is formed in the launch path, and the guide piece is arranged at a position that guides the game ball flowing backward to the specific opening in the second state. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the guidance means is in the second state in which the game balls shot from the shooting means to the game area are restricted from being guided to the specific area. also has the effect of guiding the foul ball to a specific area.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, storage means having a storage section capable of storing game balls to be supplied to the shooting means, and supply means capable of supplying game balls from the storage means to the shooting means. The game machine A4 is characterized in that the providing means pays out one or more game balls to the storage means as the game value.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it is possible to use a mechanism that pays out game balls based on the balls entering a prize-winning hole, which is conventionally provided in the game machine, and has the effect of simplifying the internal structure of the game machine. In addition, since the given game ball can be shot again by the shooting means without touching it, there is an effect that the player does not feel annoyed.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the giving means pays out one game ball each time one game ball enters the specific ball entering means. .

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, one game ball is paid out each time one game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that the player feels uncomfortable. There is an effect that it can be made not to give

Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 has a payout channel through which the game ball paid out from the giving means flows down, and the payout channel pays out based on the ball entering the specific ball entering means. It has at least a first flow path through which discharged game balls flow down, and a second flow path, different from the first flow path, for guiding the flowing down game balls to the storage means, wherein the first flow path is A gaming machine A6, characterized in that it is formed so as to guide a game ball to said shooting means without going through said storage means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A5, there is an effect that the game ball imparted by the specific ball entry means can be immediately shot.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, a game board having the game area and a frame configured to be detachable from the game board, the shooting means being arranged in the frame, A game machine A7, wherein the specific area is formed on the game board.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the foul ball generated on the game board side enters the specific ball entering means in the specific area provided on the game board, and the game ball given by the giving means is shot by the shooting means. Therefore, there is no need to provide a return path for foul balls straddling the game board and the frame as in the prior art, and there is an effect that the structure inside the game machine can be simplified.

In the gaming machine A7, the storage means, at least part of the provision means, the first flow path and the second flow path are arranged in the frame. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the path until the game ball imparted by the imparting means is shot by the launching means can be completed within the frame. Therefore, there is an effect that the structure inside the game machine can be simplified.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the shooting path is formed of wall portions erected in an arc shape facing each other with a width through which the game ball can pass, and the shooting means comprises the wall The game ball is shot to the game area along the outer peripheral side wall of the part, and the guiding means directs the game ball that flows backward along the inner peripheral side along the shooting path to the specific area. A game machine A9 characterized in that it induces to.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A9, there is an effect that the collision between the foul ball and the game ball shot by the shooting means can be avoided.

A game machine A10 characterized in that in the game machine A9, the wall portion on the inner peripheral side is formed shorter than the wall portion on the outer peripheral side.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, there is an effect that the foul ball can be efficiently guided to the specific area.

In the gaming machine A1, the shooting path is configured to have a depth that two game balls can pass in the front-rear direction, and the shooting means shoots the game balls to the game area. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that it shoots a game ball along a path through which one ball can pass on the depth side.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A8, there is an effect that the collision between the foul ball and the game ball shot by the shooting means can be avoided.

In the gaming machine A11, the shooting means can shoot a game ball with a shooting force that can reach the game area along a path through which one game ball can pass on the depth side. A gaming machine A12 characterized by:

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of the game machine A11, there is an effect that the game ball can be shot so that the foul ball and the game ball shot by the shooting means do not collide.

<Characteristic group B> (Detecting the passage of game balls and judging abnormalities)
A game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls toward the game area, and a shooting path having a path capable of guiding the shot balls shot by the shooting means to the game area. a first detection means capable of detecting the shooting ball; a second detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball, among the shooting balls, that has flowed backward along the shooting path before reaching the game area; determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is established based on the detection result of the means and the detection result of the second detecting means; and output means for outputting information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition by the determining means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player by causing a game ball shot by a shooting device to fall within a game area and entering a winning opening provided in the game area. is known (JP-A-2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, there has been a problem that an illegal game is played in which a player attempts to obtain a privilege in excess of the number of game balls shot by the shooting device.

The gaming machine B1 has the following effects. That is, it is possible to detect a shot ball and a foul ball, and output information based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor whether a fraudulent game has been played by the output information.

A game machine B2 characterized in that the predetermined condition in the game machine B1 is that the second detection means detects a game ball even though the first detection means does not detect the game ball. .

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor illegal games in which a foul ball is detected even though no game ball has been shot.

The game machine B1 or B2 includes a timer capable of measuring a predetermined time, and a timer starting means for starting the timer by the timer. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it determines that the predetermined condition has been established between.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make a judgment considering the time difference between the timing of detecting the game ball shot by the shooting means and the timing of detecting the game ball as a foul ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring fraudulent games.

In the gaming machine B3, the timing start means starts timing when the second detection means detects a game ball, and the predetermined condition is a predetermined time period measured by the timing means. (2) A game machine B4 characterized in that said second detection means detects a game ball.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, there is an effect that it is not necessary to perform constant clock time, and wasteful processing can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, among the game balls shot by the shooting means, the game balls that flow backward along the shooting path before reaching the game area are guided from the shooting path to a specific area. A gaming machine B5 comprising a guiding means, wherein the second detecting means is provided within the specific area.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, there is an effect that only foul balls can be reliably detected.

In the game machine B5, a branch opening for branching the game ball from the launch path to the specific area is provided, and the first detection means is provided immediately before the branch opening in the launch path. Machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the foul ball generated in the launch path passes through the branch and is guided to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball shot by the shooting means can be reliably detected without the first detecting means detecting the game ball flowing backward in the shooting path.

In the game machine B1 or B6, the second detection means detects the entry of the game ball that has flowed backward along the launch path before reaching the game area, among the launch balls, into a specific ball entry means. A gaming machine B7, characterized in that it comprises a giving means for giving a game value equivalent to at least one game ball each time a game ball is detected by the second detecting means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B6, there is an effect that the second detection means can be made common to the means for detecting the entry into the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic group C> (abnormality monitoring by counting foul balls)
A shooting path having a game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area, and a path capable of guiding the shot balls shot by the shooting means to the game area. a detecting means capable of detecting game balls that have flowed backward along the shooting path before reaching the game area, and counting means that counts the game balls that have flowed backward based on the detection result of the detecting means; and output means for outputting information based on the result of counting by the counting means within a predetermined period of time being the predetermined counting result.

Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player by causing a game ball shot by a shooting device to fall within a game area and entering a winning opening provided in the game area. is known (JP-A-2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, there has been a problem that an illegal game is played in which a player attempts to obtain a privilege in excess of the number of game balls shot by the shooting device.

The game machine C1 has the following effects. In other words, it is possible to count the number of foul balls and output information based on the fact that the counting result is a predetermined counting result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor whether a fraudulent game has been played by the output information.

In the game machine C1, when the counting result by the counting means becomes the first counting result predetermined as the predetermined counting result, the first counting result is obtained without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined period of time. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it outputs information based on what has happened.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the counting result becomes the first counting result, the information can be output immediately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to immediately grasp that a fraudulent game is being played.

In the game machine C1 or C2, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second counting result obtained by the counting means during the predetermined period of time is less than a first counting result predetermined as the predetermined counting result. The game machine C3 is characterized by outputting information based on the fact that the second counting result is obtained when the result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, there is an effect that both short-term fraudulent games and long-term fraudulent games can be monitored.

In any one of game machines C1 to C3, a ball detection means capable of detecting a ball fired by the shooting means, and a ball counting means for counting the balls based on the detection result of the ball detection means. wherein the output means outputs information based on the fact that the count result by the counting means within a predetermined period is greater than the count result by the shot ball counting means. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it becomes possible to compare the count result of the foul balls counted within a predetermined period with the count result of the game balls shot by the shooting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring fraudulent games.

The gaming machine C4 comprises correction number calculation means for calculating a correction number obtained by adding a predetermined number to the result counted by the number-of-balls-counting means, and the output means causes the count result obtained by the counting means within a predetermined period to be equal to the The game machine C5 is characterized by outputting information based on the fact that the number is greater than the correction number.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if a foul ball is generated at a timing that has passed through the launch ball detecting means but has not yet passed through the detecting means, correction is performed by adding a predetermined number as the allowable error range so that it is not judged to be abnormal. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring fraudulent games.

<Characteristic group D> (Structural measures for entry security)
A shooting path having a game area in which game balls can flow down, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area, and a path capable of guiding the game balls shot by the shooting means to the game area. an opening into which a game ball that has flowed backward through the launch path without reaching the game area provided in the launch path can enter; giving means for giving a game value equivalent to the entering game ball to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the entering means; A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it has a protruding piece protruding from the bottom.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a game ball shot by a shooting device is dropped in a game area, and the game ball enters a winning hole provided in the game area, thereby giving a privilege to a player. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-252627). In such a game machine, in order to obtain a privilege greater than the number of game balls fired by the shooting device, a game ball with a filament attached thereto is manipulated to detect the entry of the ball multiple times. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine D1, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for illegal games to be played by the protruding piece with which the filamentous body attached to the game ball abuts.

In the game machine D1, the game machine D2 is characterized in that the projecting piece has a substantially opening width of the opening, and is arranged so as to project to a position facing the opening.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, there is an effect that the filamentous body can be reliably brought into contact.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the protruding piece is formed of an elastic material, and when receiving the backflowing game ball, receives the backflowing game ball and guides the game ball to the opening. , a game machine D3, which is elastically deformed in the direction opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball when an external force larger than that received from the game ball flowing backward is received in the direction opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the protruding piece with which the filament abuts is elastically deformed, so there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to play illegal games.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, cutting means having a predetermined cutting force is provided at least at the tip of the projecting piece.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, by enabling the cutting means to cut the filamentous body, there is an effect that illegal games can be prevented.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the guide passage is communicated with the opening and guides a game ball entering the ball-entering means from the opening to the ball-entering means. A gaming machine D5 is characterized in that a projecting portion projecting from the side of the opening is formed in the.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, there is an effect that it is possible to make illegal games more difficult by providing a plurality of parts with which the filamentous body abuts.

In the game machine D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that the ball entry means is arranged such that the projecting portion is positioned above a ball entry portion into which the game ball enters.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a part with which the filamentous body is brought into contact with certainty.

A gaming machine D7, wherein in the gaming machine D5 or D6, a specific cutting means having a cutting force is provided at one end of the projecting portion.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5 or D6, by enabling the filamentous body to be cut by the specific cutting means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent games.

In the game machine D3, the elastic body prevents the game ball from passing through the projecting path on the basis that an external force greater than that received by the game ball flowing backward is received in a direction opposite to the projecting direction of the game ball. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being elastically deformable up to a regulation position to be regulated.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the following effects are produced. That is, even if there is a player who is playing an illegal game while playing a normal game so as not to be discovered to be playing an illegal game, the projecting piece is elastically deformed so as to block the shooting path by operating the filamentous body. Therefore, the game ball shot by the shooting means does not normally reach the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to play the illegal game and the normal game at the same time.

<Feature group E> (monitoring the malfunction of the launcher)
A game area in which a game ball can flow down, a launching means capable of varying the launching intensity and capable of causing the game ball to reach the game area when fired at a predetermined launching intensity, and the launching means a shooting instruction means for instructing shooting with an arbitrary shooting intensity; a shooting path having a path capable of guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means to the game area; and the shooting means. specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball that has flowed backward along the launch path before reaching the game area, among the game balls launched by the above; is being performed, abnormal processing execution means for executing abnormal processing when a predetermined condition based on the ball entering the specific ball entering means is satisfied.

Here, there is a gaming machine that drops a game ball fired by a shooting device in a game area and gives a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering a winning hole provided in the game area. known (JP-A-2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, if there is a problem with the launching device, the player cannot shoot the gaming machine at a desired position, and there is a risk that the privilege will not be awarded.

According to the gaming machine E1, in spite of the fact that a launch instruction is issued with a launch intensity that reaches the game area, when the condition based on the entry of a foul ball into the specific ball entry means is established, Abnormal handling can be made executable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor the failure of the launching means.

The game machine E1 is characterized by comprising an operating means operable by a player, and a variable control means for varying the firing intensity instructed by the firing instruction means based on the amount of operation of the operating means. Gaming machine E2.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, there is an effect that the malfunction of the shooting means can be monitored even in the game machine provided with the operation means and the variable control means.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, counting means for counting game balls that have entered the specific ball entering means, and determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined number or more of entering balls have been counted by the counting means during a predetermined period. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the predetermined condition is established when the number of entered balls equal to or greater than the predetermined number is counted by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is conceivable that the game ball shot by the shooting means accidentally enters the specific ball entering means due to a factor other than the failure of the shooting means. However, if the firing means fails, that state will continue. Therefore, by executing abnormality processing when a predetermined number or more of incoming balls are counted, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring failure of the shooting means.

In the game machine E2 or E3, a determination means for determining whether the firing intensity instructed by the variable control means has been varied, and based on the determination by the determination means that the firing intensity has been varied, until a predetermined period elapses. A gaming machine E4 characterized by having regulation means for regulating the execution of the abnormal process during.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, immediately after the firing intensity is varied by a sudden operation, game balls with different velocities pass through the firing path, and there is a possibility that the fired game balls collide. That is, even if the launching means is normal, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the launching specific ball entering means. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the abnormality process until a predetermined period has elapsed after the firing intensity is changed, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring failure of the firing means can be enhanced.

The game machine E5 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the abnormality process executing means executes, as the abnormality process, a process of outputting an abnormality signal indicating an abnormality to the outside.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, there is an effect that it is possible to output an abnormality signal related to the malfunction of the shooting device to the outside.

The game machine E6 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the abnormality process executing means notifies a notification mode indicating an abnormality as the abnormality process.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E5, there is an effect that it is possible to notify the outside of the failure of the launch delivery.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, comprising a game value imparting means for imparting a game value equivalent to one game ball to the player based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. A gaming machine E7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the following effects can be achieved. In other words, game value can be imparted using the specific ball entry means used for detecting the malfunction of the launching device. Therefore, there is an effect that means for detecting game balls can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E7, the abnormality processing execution means executes the abnormality processing when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means when the operation amount of the operation means is equal to or greater than a predetermined operation amount. The game machine E8 is characterized by:

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E7, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor failure of the shooting means under specific conditions.

Any one of the game machines E5 to E8 is provided with determination means for determining that the player is in an advantageous state, and the abnormality processing execution means executes the abnormality processing based on the determination result of the determination means. The gaming machine E9 is characterized by having different contents.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E5 to E8, the contents of the abnormality processing can be changed according to the game state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to raise the priority of the abnormal signal during the jackpot.

In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determining means continuously determines that the number of entered balls equal to or greater than the predetermined number is counted. Gaming machine E10.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a problem occurs in the launching means, the state will continue unless the launching means is repaired, so that the discriminating means will continuously discriminate. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring malfunction of the launching means.

<Feature group F> (replay when game ball is shot to unintended position)
A game area in which game balls can flow down; a shooting means capable of shooting game balls toward the game area and capable of varying the shooting intensity depending on the amount of electric power supplied; and the first firing intensity when the amount of power supplied is less than the amount of power required for firing at the first firing intensity A shooting intensity correcting means for correcting the shooting intensity to a second shooting intensity or less that is weaker than the second shooting intensity, and a game ball can be entered by shooting a game ball at the second shooting intensity or less corrected by the shooting intensity correcting means. A game machine F1 characterized by comprising a specific ball entry means and an imparting means for imparting a game value equivalent to at least one ball each time one game ball enters the specific ball entry means. .

Here, there is known a game machine having a game feature in which, when a specific state (jackpot state) occurs, the firing intensity of the firing device is adjusted to aim at a predetermined location in the game area (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). publication). In such a gaming machine, if a game ball is shot at a location other than the predetermined location during the above-described specific state, the game ball is wasted. was dissatisfied with

According to the game machine F1, when the game ball cannot be shot with the shooting intensity instructed by the shooting instruction means, the shooting intensity is corrected to a weaker shooting intensity, and the game ball is shot with the corrected shooting intensity. Become. Since a game value equivalent to the shot game ball is given, wasteful consumption of the game ball is eliminated. Therefore, there is an effect that dissatisfaction of the player can be eliminated.

In the gaming machine F1, the specific ball entry means is provided in a guiding portion for guiding game balls that have flowed backward along the launch path without reaching the game area, among the balls launched by the launch means, The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second firing strength is weaker than a firing strength required for the shot ball to reach the game area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball shot with the corrected shooting intensity enters the specific ball entering means without reaching the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value equivalent to the shot useless balls can be given to the player without affecting the game in the game area.

In the gaming machine F1, the specific ball-entering means is provided in a specific area in which it is difficult for a game ball launched at the first launch intensity to enter the game area, and the second launch intensity is the The game machine F3 is characterized in that the shot ball is stronger than the shooting intensity required to reach the game area.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball shot with the corrected shooting intensity can enter the specific ball entry means provided in the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value equivalent to the useless ball fired using the ball entry means provided in the game area can be given to the player.

The game machine F2 comprises an abnormality determination means for determining an abnormality based on the ball entering the specific ball entry means, and the specific ball entry means while the launch intensity is corrected by the launch intensity correction means. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the entry of a ball into is excluded from the determination of the abnormality.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the accuracy of the abnormality determination means is improved because the result of intentionally entering a ball into a specific ball hole is excluded from the determination by the abnormality determination means. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machines F1 to F4, the shooting means includes an operating section capable of changing the shooting intensity to a first shooting intensity by pressing, and the predetermined operation is operating the operating section. A gaming machine F5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, it is possible to supply the required amount of power to the shooting means in response to the operation of the operation unit that changes the shooting intensity by a simple operation. There is an effect that it is possible to cope with a situation where it is not possible to make it in time.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F1 to F5, output means for outputting information based on the fact that the firing intensity correcting means corrects the firing intensity.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines F1 to F5, by outputting information based on the fact that the shot is being performed with the corrected intensity, for example, the player can grasp By displaying on the screen, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

A gaming machine F7, characterized in that, in the gaming machine F6, there is provided an informing means for informing a player in a recognizable manner based on the information output by the output means.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the player can recognize that the ball is being shot with the corrected strength, thereby preventing the player from being confused. has the effect of

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, specific ball entry information based on entry of a game ball into the specific ball entry means and entry of a game ball into entry means provided in the game area based on entry of a game ball A gaming machine F8 characterized by comprising external output means capable of outputting information and information to the outside.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, by outputting the ball entry information and the specific ball entry information respectively, the information receiver side can obtain the ball entry information obtained as a result of the game and the ball entry information obtained with the intention of returning the game ball to the player. can be managed separately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to accurately determine the situation of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls enter a prize winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through a prize winning opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a game ball shot by a shooting device is dropped in a game area, and the game ball enters a winning hole provided in the game area, thereby giving a privilege to a player. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-252627).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to obtain a privilege greater than the number of game balls fired by the shooting device, a game ball attached with a filamentous body is manipulated and the ball is detected multiple times. There was a problem that
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraudulent games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises a game area in which game balls can flow down, shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area, and game balls shot by the shooting means. A launch path having a path that can be guided to the game area, and an opening into which a game ball that has flowed backward through the launch path without reaching the game area provided in the launch path can enter; A game value equivalent to the entered game ball is given to the player based on the entry means for allowing the game ball entered into the opening and the entry of the game ball into the entry means. and a protruding piece protruding from below the opening toward the firing path.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, wherein the protruding piece has a substantially opening width of the opening, and is arranged so as to protrude to a position facing the opening. is.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the protruding piece is formed of an elastic body, and when receiving the game ball that has flowed backward, the game ball that has flowed backward Receiving the ball, guiding the game ball to the opening, and receiving an external force greater than that received from the backflowing game ball in a direction opposite to the shooting direction of the game ball, elastically in the opposite direction It transforms.
The gaming machine of Technical Idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 3, wherein cutting means having a predetermined cutting force is provided at least at the tip of the projecting piece. .
A gaming machine according to Technical Idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is communicated with the opening, and the game ball entered from the opening is inserted into the ball entering means. It has a guide channel for guiding to the means, and the guide channel is formed with a protruding portion protruding from the opening side.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for illegal games to be played by the protruding piece with which the filamentous body attached to the game ball abuts.
According to the game machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of technical idea 1, there is an effect that the filamentous body can be reliably brought into contact.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of technical idea 1 or 2, since the projecting piece with which the filament abuts is elastically deformed, it is possible to make it difficult to play illegal games. be.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, by making it possible to cut the filamentous body by the cutting means, it is possible to prevent fraudulent games. There is
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, it is possible to make it more difficult to play illegal games by providing a plurality of parts where the filamentous body abuts. It has the effect of being able to

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
51 operation handle (projection means)
111 payout control device (granting means)
601 foul winning entrance (entering ball means)
602 guide member (protruding piece)
604 second opening (opening)
701 launch path

Claims (5)

a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area;
a shooting path having a path capable of guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means to the game area;
an opening into which a game ball that has flowed backward on the launch path without reaching the game area provided on the launch path can enter;
a ball entry means capable of entering the game ball that has entered the opening;
a granting means for granting a game value equivalent to the entering game ball to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the entering means;
and a protruding piece that protrudes toward the launch path from below the opening. 2. A game machine according to claim 1, wherein said protruding piece has a substantially opening width of said opening, and is arranged so as to protrude to a position facing said opening. The protruding piece is made of an elastic material,
When the backflowing game ball is received, the backflowing game ball is received and the game ball is guided to the opening, and an external force greater than that received from the backflowing game ball is the shooting direction of the game ball. 3. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine elastically deforms in the opposite direction when receiving in the opposite direction. 4. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein at least the tip of said projecting piece is provided with cutting means having a predetermined cutting force. a guide passage that communicates with the opening and guides a game ball that has entered the ball entering means from the opening to the ball entering means;
5. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the guide passage is formed with a projecting portion projecting from the side of the opening.

Images